WO2021258766A1 - Method and device for configuring terminal device - Google Patents

Method and device for configuring terminal device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021258766A1
WO2021258766A1 PCT/CN2021/078746 CN2021078746W WO2021258766A1 WO 2021258766 A1 WO2021258766 A1 WO 2021258766A1 CN 2021078746 W CN2021078746 W CN 2021078746W WO 2021258766 A1 WO2021258766 A1 WO 2021258766A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal device
network device
field
configuration information
version
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/078746
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
邝奕如
袁锴
何彦召
徐海博
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202010740597.9A external-priority patent/CN114095978B/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2021258766A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021258766A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08Reselecting an access point

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a method and device for configuring terminal equipment.
  • Cell handover across base stations means that when a terminal device moves from the coverage area of one base station (source base station) to the coverage area of another base station (target base station), the original communication connection of the terminal device will be changed and transferred to another base station. A communication connection, so that the terminal device continues to maintain a communication connection with the base station.
  • the source base station Before the terminal device performs cell handover, the source base station will issue configuration information to the terminal device, for example, called configuration information 1.
  • the configuration information 1 may include one or more information elements (IE), and the configuration information 1 is for the terminal
  • the device communicates under the source base station. During the cell handover process, the source base station will send configuration information 1 to the target base station.
  • IE information elements
  • the target base station will also send configuration information to the terminal device (forwarded by the source base station), for example, called configuration information 2.
  • the configuration information 2 may include one or more IEs, and the configuration information 2 is used for the terminal device
  • the configuration information 2 may be determined according to the configuration information 1. After the terminal device switches to the target base station, the configuration information 2 can be applied.
  • the communication version supported by each base station may be different, so the communication version of the source base station and the target base station may be different.
  • the communication version of the source base station may be higher than the communication version of the target base station. Since the base station of the higher version supports more functions than the base station of the lower version, the base station of the higher version can be configured with more IEs, but the base station of the lower version cannot recognize the IE corresponding to the new function because it does not have new functions. Since the target base station cannot recognize these IEs, it will not send these IEs to the terminal device.
  • the characteristic of some IEs is that if the terminal device received the IE last time, but did not receive the IE this time, it indicates that the terminal device needs to continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the IE received last time. Therefore, for this type of IE, if the terminal device determines that the source base station has sent the IE to the terminal device, but the target base station has not sent the IE to the terminal device, the terminal device will continue to use the configuration corresponding to the IE from the source base station. However, the target base station cannot recognize the IE, and naturally cannot support the configuration corresponding to the IE, which may cause the terminal device to fail to communicate normally under the target base station.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for configuring a terminal device, which are used to make the IE applied by the terminal device and the network device consistent, and to ensure the normal communication of the terminal device under the network device.
  • a first method for configuring a terminal device includes: before a cell handover, determining first configuration information of a first network device, where the first network device is a source for the terminal device to perform the cell handover Network equipment; in the cell handover process, receiving second configuration information from a second network equipment, where the second network equipment is the terminal device for the target network equipment for the cell handover; determining the first configuration
  • the information includes a first field, and the second configuration information does not include the first field, where the first field is when the second configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the first field ,
  • the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time; release the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information.
  • the method may be executed by a first communication device, and the first communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the first communication device is a terminal device, or a chip set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device.
  • the first communication device is a terminal device.
  • the first field is a field that needs to be inherited, that is, if the terminal device received the first field last time, but did not receive the first field this time, the terminal device needs to continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field received last time.
  • the terminal device determines that the first configuration information from the first network device includes the first field, and the first configuration information from the target network device does not include the first field, the terminal device can release the first field.
  • the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the configuration information that is, the terminal device no longer applies the previously received configuration corresponding to the first field.
  • the second network device did not send the first field to the terminal device. It is probably because the second network device cannot recognize the first field. Therefore, the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the first field, which can make the terminal device and the second network device apply The fields are kept consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
  • the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information can configure the terminal device to send overheat-related information to the network device, or configure the terminal device not to send overheat-related information to the network device.
  • the overheating configuration information includes:
  • First indication information where the first indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
  • the timing duration of the prohibition timer wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  • the terminal device does not send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  • the terminal device may send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device When sending the auxiliary information related to overheating or after sending the auxiliary information related to overheating, the terminal device starts the prohibition timer.
  • the network device receives the auxiliary information related to overheating or when receiving the auxiliary information related to overheating.
  • the prohibit timer is also started.
  • the terminal device cannot send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device, and the terminal device can only send the auxiliary information related to the overheating to the network device when the prohibition timer expires or after the timeout.
  • the overheating configuration information includes the first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that the auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device, and the overheating configuration information does not include the timing duration of the prohibition timer, the terminal device may be required It sends auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device at any time.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
  • the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device is the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device
  • the maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band or,
  • Type information of the terminal device is not limited.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers supported by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum number of auxiliary cells in the downlink supported by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the terminal device's
  • the maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that each supported frequency band can support, and the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum aggregate bandwidth supported by the terminal device in each frequency band supported.
  • the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that can be supported by each frequency band, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of each frequency band supported by the terminal device, and the type information of the terminal device; or, auxiliary information related to overheating It can include the maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of uplink auxiliary cells supported by the terminal device, the maximum number of downlink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of downlink auxiliary cells supported by the terminal device, and the maximum uplink aggregation that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band Bandwidth, the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that each serving cell of each supported frequency band of the terminal device can support, and the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers supported by the terminal device in each frequency band supported.
  • the configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating (which can be understood as the value of the parameter included in the auxiliary information related to overheating) is the configuration expected by the terminal device, rather than the configuration that can be actually supported by the capabilities of the terminal device, for example ,
  • the configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating may be lower than or equal to the configuration actually supported by the capabilities of the terminal device. It can be understood that if the terminal device applies the configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating, the overheating of the terminal device can be improved.
  • the fourth aspect of the first aspect may be In an optional implementation manner, before releasing the first field included in the first configuration information, the method further includes:
  • the second configuration information does not include the field corresponding to the first version, and does not include the field corresponding to any version higher than the first version, and the first version is the communication version corresponding to the first field .
  • the terminal device can determine the demand code corresponding to the field, and if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field needs to be inherited
  • the first field is a field that needs to be inherited.
  • the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M.
  • the terminal device can release the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information, that is, the terminal The device will not continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device does not need to determine the communication version corresponding to the field, as long as a field is included in the first configuration information and not included in the second configuration information, and the field is a field that needs to be inherited, the terminal device can The configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information is released, so that the terminal device no longer applies the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device may also determine the communication version corresponding to the field, and then perform corresponding processing. For example, for each field in one or more fields that are included in the first configuration information but not included in the second configuration information, the terminal device may determine the demand code corresponding to the field, and if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field is required Inherited fields, for example, the first field is the field that needs to be inherited. For example, the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M, and the communication version corresponding to the first field is the first version.
  • the terminal device can further determine , Whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to the first version, or determine whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to any version higher than the first version, or determine whether the second configuration information includes the first version Other fields corresponding to the version, and determining whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to any version higher than the first version. If the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to the first version, or includes other fields corresponding to any version higher than the first version, or includes other fields corresponding to the first version and includes any other fields higher than the first version Version corresponding to other fields, then the terminal device can determine that the second network device can support the first version corresponding to the first field.
  • the reason why the second configuration information does not include the first field may be that the second network device thinks that the terminal device needs Continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information. Therefore, in this case, the terminal device does not need to release the content of the first field included in the first configuration information, but can continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device can try not to release the content included in the fields that the second network device can support, so that the configuration of the terminal device and the second network device are consistent, and ensure that the terminal device can perform normally under the second network device. data communication.
  • the fifth aspect of the first aspect may be In an optional embodiment, the method further includes:
  • the capability of the terminal device is adjusted from a first capability to a second capability, where the first capability is lower than the second capability, and the first capability is that the first network device is adapted to the second capability.
  • the content of a field is configured.
  • the first network device can decide whether to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, so as to alleviate the overheating problem of the terminal device. If the first network device decides to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, the first network device may determine the air interface configuration information according to the received auxiliary information related to overheating, and include the air interface configuration information in the RRC reconfiguration message and send it to the terminal device. After receiving the air interface configuration information, the terminal device can apply the air interface configuration information to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device.
  • the capability of the terminal device is the second capability
  • the capability of the terminal device is the first capability
  • the first capability is lower than the second capability.
  • the second network device may not support the communication version corresponding to the first field, that is, the target network device cannot recognize the first field, so the second network device naturally cannot learn about the terminal device.
  • the ability is adjusted according to the first field. Therefore, the terminal device can adjust the capability of the terminal device back to the second capability, so that the second network device can schedule the terminal device according to the second capability, reducing the ability of the terminal device and the actual application of the terminal device as understood by the second network device.
  • a second method for configuring a terminal device comprising: determining that the second version is lower than the first version, the first version is the communication version of the first network device, and the second version is the second version.
  • the communication version corresponding to the network device, the first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover; to the terminal device
  • Send first information the first information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field, where the first field is when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the first field, the terminal
  • the device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time; send a switching command to the terminal device, where the switching command is used to instruct to switch from the first network device to the second network device.
  • the method may be executed by a second communication device, and the second communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the second communication device is a network device, or a chip set in the network device for realizing the function of the network device, or other component used for realizing the function of the network device.
  • the second communication device is a network device, for example, the first network device.
  • the first network device is an access network device.
  • the first network device determines that the communication version of the second network device is lower than the communication version of the first network device, it can instruct the terminal device to release all or part of the configuration corresponding to the fields that need to be inherited. In this way, the terminal The device no longer applies the configuration corresponding to these fields previously received. In this way, the application fields of the terminal device and the target network device can be kept consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the target network device.
  • the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to the difference between the first version and the second version Other versions of.
  • the second network device can support. If the first network device includes these fields in the configuration information and sends it to the second network device, the second network device can be identified and can also make further configurations based on these fields. Therefore, in this way, the first network device needs to determine the specific version of the second network device, and also the version corresponding to the field. The first network device just instructs the terminal device to release the field corresponding to the first version, and release the field corresponding to the first version.
  • the first information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field, including :
  • the first information includes the first field, and the content of the first field is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field; or,
  • the first information is first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to one or more fields
  • the one or more fields include the first field
  • the one or more fields include the first field
  • Each field in the field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the field received last time when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the field.
  • the first information may be configuration information.
  • the first content may indicate the release of the corresponding field.
  • the configuration information previously configured for the terminal device by the first network device includes the first field
  • the first information also includes the first field
  • the content of the first field is the first content
  • the first content is used to indicate the release of the first field.
  • the corresponding configuration in other words, is used to indicate the release of the content of the first field.
  • the first network device resending new configuration information to the terminal device to instruct to release all or part of the fields that need to be inherited included in the original configuration information.
  • This indication method is relatively clear for the terminal device, and the terminal device can determine which fields need to be released according to the fields included in the first information.
  • the first information may be indication information, for example called first indication information, and the first indication information may occupy one or more bits.
  • the first indication information may indicate to release the configuration corresponding to one or more fields, and the first field is, for example, one of the one or more fields. These one or more fields are all fields that need to be inherited. These one or more fields are all or part of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information previously configured for the terminal device by the first network device, that is, the first indication
  • the information is used to indicate the release of all or part of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the first indication information, it can release all or part of the content of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information from the first network device stored on the terminal device side, so that the configuration information included in the configuration information is no longer applied.
  • the field released by the terminal device includes the first field.
  • the first network device does not need to re-send new configuration information to the terminal device, but only needs to send the first instruction information to the terminal device to instruct the release of the corresponding field.
  • the information amount of the first indication information is small, which helps to save transmission overhead.
  • the method further include:
  • the first configuration information includes a field configured by the first network device for the terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include the first field.
  • the first network device may obtain the first configuration information according to the configuration information previously configured to the terminal device by the first network device. For example, the first network device deletes all or part of the fields that need to be inherited from the configuration information previously configured for the terminal device, and the configuration information obtained thereby may be the first configuration information. These fields deleted by the first network device from the configuration information previously configured for the terminal device are the fields that the first network device instructs the terminal device to release.
  • the second network device can configure the terminal device according to the first configuration information. Since the first configuration information does not include fields that need to be inherited that the second network device cannot recognize, the second network device can configure the terminal device normally.
  • the fourth aspect of the second aspect may be In an optional implementation manner, the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information includes:
  • Second indication information where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
  • the timing duration of the prohibition timer wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
  • the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device is the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device
  • the maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band or,
  • Type information of the terminal device is not limited.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second network device may send version indication information to the first network device, so that the first network device can determine the communication version of the second network device for subsequent related operations.
  • the eighth aspect of the second aspect may be In an optional embodiment, the method further includes:
  • the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use a full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, and the full configuration mode is to configure the terminal device to be configured to the The way in which all fields of the terminal device are reconfigured.
  • the configuration mode applied by the second network device is the inheritance configuration mode, or iterative configuration mode, that is, the next configuration needs to be performed based on the previous configuration, for example, based on the first configuration.
  • the first configuration information of the network device determines the second configuration information, that is, the second configuration information is not configured in a full configuration manner.
  • the second network device may also adopt a full configuration mode, which is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
  • a full configuration mode which is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
  • the embodiment of this application does not limit the configuration method adopted by the second network device, but if the second network device adopts the full configuration method, for the first network device, there is no need to instruct the terminal device to release the fields that need to be inherited . Therefore, as an optional implementation manner, the second network device may send configuration instruction information to the first network device, and the first network device may receive configuration instruction information from the second network device.
  • the configuration instruction information may indicate that the second network device has not configured the terminal device in a full configuration mode, so that the first network device can perform subsequent related operations.
  • a third method for configuring a terminal device includes: sending version indication information to a first network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate a second version, and the second version is the second network device The communication version of the; receiving first configuration information from the first network device, where the first configuration information includes a field configured by the first network device for a terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include the first field ,
  • the first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover
  • the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover, wherein the first field is the current
  • the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time.
  • the method may be executed by a third communication device, and the third communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the third communication device is a network device, or a chip set in the network device for realizing the function of the network device, or other component used for realizing the function of the network device.
  • the third communication device is a network device, such as a second network device.
  • the second network device is an access network device.
  • the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to other versions between the first version and the second version
  • the first version is a communication version of the first network device, wherein the second version is lower than the first version.
  • the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information includes:
  • Second indication information where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
  • the timing duration of the prohibition timer wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
  • the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device is the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device
  • the maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band or,
  • Type information of the terminal device is not limited.
  • the method further includes:
  • the method further includes:
  • the second configuration information includes fields configured by the second network device for the terminal device, and the second configuration information is obtained according to the first configuration information .
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the first communication device as described above.
  • the first communication device is configured to execute the foregoing first aspect or the method in any optional implementation of the first aspect.
  • the first communication device may include a module for executing the method in the first aspect or any optional implementation of the first aspect, for example, a processing module, and optionally, a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may also be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the first communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the first communication device is a terminal device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor (or a processing circuit).
  • the sending module can be implemented by a transmitter
  • the receiving module can be implemented by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver can be different functional modules, or can be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the transceiver (or transmitter and receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the first communication device is continued to be a terminal device, and the processing module, the sending module, and the receiving module are used as examples for the introduction. in,
  • the processing module is configured to determine first configuration information of a first network device before the cell handover, where the first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
  • the receiving module is configured to receive second configuration information from a second network device during the cell handover process, where the second network device is a target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
  • the processing module is further configured to determine that the first configuration information includes a first field, and the second configuration information does not include the first field, where the first field is when the terminal device receives When the second configuration information does not include the first field, the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time;
  • the processing module is further configured to release the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information.
  • the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information includes:
  • First indication information where the first indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
  • the timing duration of the prohibition timer wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
  • the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device is the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device
  • the maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band or,
  • Type information of the terminal device is not limited.
  • the fourth aspect of the fourth aspect may be In an optional implementation manner, the processing module is further configured to determine that the second configuration information does not include the field corresponding to the first version before releasing the first field included in the first configuration information, and The field corresponding to any version higher than the first version is not included, and the first version is the communication version corresponding to the first field.
  • the processing module is further configured to adjust the capability of the terminal device from a first capability to a second capability, where the first capability is lower than the second capability, and the first capability is lower than the second capability.
  • the capability is configured by the first network device to adapt the content of the first field.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the second communication device as described above.
  • the second communication device is configured to execute the foregoing second aspect or the method in any optional implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the second communication device may include a module for executing the method in the second aspect or any optional implementation of the second aspect, for example, a processing module, and optionally, a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may also be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the second communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device, such as a first network device.
  • the first network device is an access network device, such as a base station.
  • the second communication device is the first network device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor (or a processing circuit).
  • the sending module may be realized by a transmitter, and the receiving module may be realized by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the transceiver (or, transmitter and receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the second communication device is the first network device, and the processing module, the sending module, and the receiving module are used as examples for the introduction. in,
  • the processing module is configured to determine that the second version is lower than the first version, the first version is the communication version of the first network device, the second version is the communication version corresponding to the second network device, and the first version is the communication version corresponding to the second network device.
  • the network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
  • the sending module is configured to send first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used to instruct to release the configuration corresponding to the first field, where the first field is the configuration information received by the terminal device When the first field is not included, the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time;
  • the sending module is further configured to send a switching command to the terminal device, where the switching command is used to instruct to switch from the first network device to the second network device.
  • the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to the difference between the first version and the second version Other versions of.
  • the first information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field, including :
  • the first information includes the first field, and the content of the first field is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field; or,
  • the first information is first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to one or more fields
  • the one or more fields include the first field
  • the one or more fields include the first field
  • Each field in the field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the field received last time when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the field.
  • the sending module Is also used to send first configuration information to the second network device, where the first configuration information includes the fields configured by the first network device for the terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include the The first field.
  • the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information includes:
  • Second indication information where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
  • the timing duration of the prohibition timer wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
  • the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device is the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device
  • the maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band or,
  • Type information of the terminal device is not limited.
  • the receiving module is configured to receive version indication information from the second network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate that the communication version of the second network device is the second version.
  • the receiving module is configured to receive configuration indication information from the second network device, and the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device ,
  • the full configuration mode is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the third communication device as described above.
  • the third communication device is configured to execute the foregoing third aspect or the method in any optional implementation manner of the third aspect.
  • the third communication device may include a module for executing the method in the third aspect or any optional implementation of the third aspect, for example, a processing module, and optionally, a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may also be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the third communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device, such as a second network device.
  • the second network device is an access network device, such as a base station.
  • the third communication device is the second network device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor (or a processing circuit).
  • the sending module may be realized by a transmitter, and the receiving module may be realized by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the third communication device is a chip set in the communication device
  • the transceiver (or, the transmitter and the receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the third communication device is continued to be the second network device, and the processing module, the sending module, and the receiving module are used as examples for the introduction. in,
  • the sending module is configured to send version indication information to a first network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate a second version, and the second version is a communication version of the second network device;
  • the receiving module is configured to receive first configuration information from the first network device, where the first configuration information includes a field configured by the first network device for a terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include In the first field, the first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover, wherein the first The field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the first field received last time when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the first field.
  • the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to other versions between the first version and the second version
  • the first version is a communication version of the first network device, wherein the second version is lower than the first version.
  • the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information includes:
  • Second indication information where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device.
  • the timing duration of the prohibition timer wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
  • the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device is the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device
  • the maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band or,
  • Type information of the terminal device is not limited.
  • the sending module is further configured to send configuration indication information to the first network device, and the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device ,
  • the full configuration mode is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
  • the sending module is further configured to send second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information includes a field configured by the second network device for the terminal device, and the The second configuration information is obtained according to the first configuration information.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the first communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor (or processing circuit) and a communication interface (or interface circuit), and the communication interface can be used to communicate with other devices or equipment.
  • it may also include a memory for storing computer instructions.
  • the processor and the memory are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing first aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the first communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the first communication device.
  • the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing first aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the first communication device when the processor executes the computer instructions stored in the memory, the first communication device is caused to execute the foregoing first aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the first communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface is implemented, for example, by a transceiver (or, a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, the transceiver is implemented by an antenna, a feeder and a receiver in the communication device. Codec and other implementations.
  • the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the second communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor (or processing circuit) and a communication interface (or interface circuit), and the communication interface can be used to communicate with other devices or equipment.
  • it may also include a memory for storing computer instructions.
  • the processor and the memory are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing second aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the second communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the second communication device.
  • the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing second aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the second communication device is caused to execute the foregoing second aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the second communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device, such as a first network device.
  • the first network device is an access network device, such as a base station.
  • the communication interface is realized by, for example, a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, the transceiver is realized by an antenna, a feeder and a receiver in the communication device. Codec and other implementations.
  • the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the aforementioned third communication device.
  • the communication device includes a processor (or processing circuit) and a communication interface (or interface circuit), and the communication interface can be used to communicate with other devices or equipment.
  • it may also include a memory for storing computer instructions.
  • the processor and the memory are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing third aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • the third communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the third communication device.
  • the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing third aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • the third communication device is caused to execute the foregoing third aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • the third communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device, such as a second network device.
  • the second network device is an access network device, such as a base station.
  • the communication interface is realized by, for example, a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device.
  • the transceiver is realized by the antenna, feeder, and Codec and other implementations.
  • the third communication device is a chip set in a communication device, the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a first communication system includes the communication device according to the fourth aspect or the communication device according to the seventh aspect.
  • a second communication system comprising the communication device according to the fifth aspect or the communication device according to the eighth aspect, and the communication device according to the sixth aspect or the ninth aspect The communication device.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect or the first aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or the second aspect described above.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the third aspect or the third aspect described above. The method described in any one of the optional implementations of the aspect.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided.
  • the computer program product is used to store a computer program.
  • the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect or the first aspect. Any one of the methods described in the optional implementation mode.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or the second aspect described above. Any one of the methods described in the optional implementation mode.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided.
  • the computer program product is used to store a computer program.
  • the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the third aspect or the third aspect. Any one of the methods described in the optional implementation mode.
  • the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the first field, which can keep the fields applied by the terminal device and the second network device consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
  • Figure 1 is a flow chart of network equipment configuring terminal equipment
  • Figure 2 is a flowchart of a terminal device sending UE auxiliary information to a network device
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device performing cell handover
  • Figure 4 is a flow chart of the cell handover process
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the first method for configuring terminal equipment provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a second method for configuring a terminal device according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a first network device according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a second network device according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is still another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • Terminal devices including devices that provide users with voice and/or data connectivity, specifically, include devices that provide users with voice, or include devices that provide users with data connectivity, or include devices that provide users with voice and data connectivity Sexual equipment.
  • it may include a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the terminal device can communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), exchange voice or data with the RAN, or exchange voice and data with the RAN.
  • RAN radio access network
  • the terminal equipment may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle to everything (V2X) terminal equipment , Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit, subscriber unit station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user Agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • M2M/MTC Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications
  • IoT Internet of things
  • subscriber unit subscriber unit station
  • mobile station mobile station
  • remote station remote station
  • access point AP
  • remote terminal remote terminal
  • access terminal access terminal
  • user terminal user terminal
  • user Agent user agent
  • user equipment user device
  • it may include mobile phones (or “cellular” phones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, mobile devices with built-in computers, and so on.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • PCS cordless phone
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • restricted devices such as devices with low power consumption, or devices with limited storage capabilities, or devices with limited computing capabilities. Examples include barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • GPS global positioning system
  • laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is the general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes Wait.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable device is not only a kind of hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • Use such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
  • the various terminal devices introduced above if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be considered as vehicle-mounted terminal equipment.
  • vehicle-mounted terminal equipment is, for example, also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
  • the terminal device may also include a relay. Or it can be understood that everything that can communicate with the base station can be regarded as a terminal device.
  • the device used to implement the function of the terminal device may be a terminal device, or a device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the terminal device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the device for implementing the functions of the terminal is a terminal device as an example to describe the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • Network equipment including, for example, access network (AN) equipment, such as a base station (e.g., access point), which can refer to equipment that communicates with wireless terminal equipment through one or more cells on the air interface in the access network
  • AN access network
  • a base station e.g., access point
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • RSU roadside unit
  • the base station can be used to convert received air frames and IP packets into each other, and act as a router between the terminal device and the rest of the access network, where the rest of the access network can include the IP network.
  • the RSU can be a fixed infrastructure entity that supports V2X applications, and can exchange messages with other entities that support V2X applications.
  • the network equipment can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface.
  • the network equipment may include the evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in the LTE system or the long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A), or may also include the fifth-generation mobile Communication technology (the 5th generation, 5G) new radio (NR) system (also referred to as the NR system) next generation node B (next generation node B, gNB) or may also include cloud radio
  • the centralized unit (CU) and distributed unit (DU) in the access network (Cloud RAN) system are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the network equipment may also include core network equipment.
  • the core network equipment includes, for example, access and mobility management functions (AMF), session management functions (SMF) or user plane functions in the 5G system. function, UPF), etc., or include the mobility management entity (MME) in the 4G system.
  • AMF access and mobility management functions
  • SMF session management functions
  • UPF user plane functions
  • MME mobility management entity
  • the device used to implement the function of the network device may be a network device, or a device capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device.
  • the device used to implement the functions of the network equipment is a network device as an example to describe the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the network equipment described below all refer to the access network equipment.
  • first and second configuration information are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the size, content, order, and timing of multiple objects. , Priority or importance, etc.
  • first configuration information and the second configuration information can be the same configuration information or different configuration information, and this name does not indicate the size, content, and priority of the two configuration information. Or the degree of importance is different.
  • the network device After the terminal device is connected to the network device, the network device needs to issue a wireless access configuration to the terminal device, and the terminal device applies the configuration issued by the network device, so that the terminal device can perform data communication normally under the network device.
  • Figure 1 for the flow chart of configuring terminal devices for network devices.
  • the network device sends a configuration message to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the configuration message from the network device.
  • the configuration message may be a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) reconfiguration (RRC reconfiguration) message, or an RRC setup (RRC setup) message, or an RRC reestablishment (RRC reestablishment) message, or RRC resume (RRC resume) messages, etc.
  • the configuration message may include the parameters configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the configured parameters may include: radio bearer configuration parameters, physical layer (PHY) parameters, medium access control layer (medium access control, One or more of MAC) parameters, radio link control (RLC) parameters, or security parameters.
  • the network device may send configuration messages to the terminal device multiple times. Therefore, the configuration message sent at a certain time can be further configured based on the previous configuration message, that is, the network device adopts a relative configuration (delta configuration) The way.
  • the configuration message may include one or more IEs, each IE is a field or a field, and an IE may be understood as a parameter, or it may be understood as an IE including a parameter.
  • each IE can correspond to corresponding need codes, and the need codes corresponding to different IEs may be the same or different.
  • For the requirement code please refer to the introduction in Table 1.
  • Table 1 lists 4 kinds of demand codes. For example, if the requirement code corresponding to a field is the requirement code R (ie, need R), then this field is a field that needs to be inherited, and the parameters configured through this field can be regarded as non-one-time parameters. That is, if the terminal device previously received the field, but did not receive the field this time, the terminal device needs to release the configuration corresponding to the field previously received, that is, the terminal device will not continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the field previously received . And if the terminal device has received this field before, and this field is also received this time, the terminal device needs to apply the configuration corresponding to the field received this time.
  • R requirement code
  • the field is the field that needs to be inherited, and the parameters configured through the field can be considered as non-one-time parameters. That is, if the terminal device previously received this field, but did not receive this field this time, the terminal device needs to continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the field received before, that is, it needs to continue to apply the parameters included in the previously received field. And if the terminal device has received this field before, and this field is also received this time, the terminal device needs to apply the configuration corresponding to the field received this time.
  • the network device first sends configuration message 1 to the terminal device.
  • Configuration message 1 includes IE1, IE2, and IE3, where the demand code corresponding to IE1 is needM, and the demand code corresponding to IE2 and IE3 are both needR, then the terminal equipment Apply the configuration corresponding to IE1, the configuration corresponding to IE2, and the configuration corresponding to IE3.
  • the network device sends a configuration message 2 to the terminal device, and the configuration message 2 is further configured according to the configuration message 1.
  • the configuration message 2 includes IE2 and IE4, and the demand code corresponding to IE4 is the demand code N.
  • configuration message 2 is re-issued with IE2, the terminal device applies the configuration corresponding to IE2 included in configuration message 2, and if IE4 is newly issued in configuration message 2, the terminal device applies the configuration corresponding to IE4 included in configuration message 2. .
  • configuration message 2 does not include IE1, but configuration message 1 includes IE1, and the demand code corresponding to IE1 is need M. Therefore, the terminal device continues to apply the configuration corresponding to IE1 included in configuration message 1.
  • the configuration message 2 does not include IE3, and the demand code corresponding to IE3 is need R. Therefore, the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to IE3 included in the configuration message 1, that is, the terminal device does not apply the configuration corresponding to IE3 included in the configuration message 1.
  • the terminal device applies the configuration included in the configuration message. According to this configuration, the terminal device can perform data communication normally under the current network device.
  • the terminal device may overheat during use. Then, when the terminal device has an overheating problem inside the device, the temperature of the terminal device can be reduced by reducing the capacity or configuration of the terminal device to solve the overheating problem.
  • the terminal device can send UE assistance information to the network device.
  • the UE assistance information is overheating assistance information to notify the network device of the expected reduced capability or configuration of the terminal device for the network device. Device reference for reconfiguration.
  • the network device needs to send the overheating configuration information to the terminal device first, so that the terminal device can send the UE auxiliary information to the network device.
  • the overheating configuration information sent by the network device to the terminal device may be included in the configuration message sent by the network device to the terminal device, such as the configuration message shown in S11 in the process shown in FIG. 1. Please refer to FIG. 2 below to introduce the process of sending UE auxiliary information from a terminal device to a network device.
  • the network device sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the RRC reconfiguration message from the network device.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message may be understood as a configuration message, and the RRC reconfiguration message may include overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information includes, for example, information used to indicate whether the terminal device can send overheating auxiliary information to the network device, and the value of a prohibition timer related to overheating. Among them, the prohibition timer is used by the network device to control the frequency of the terminal device reporting the overheating auxiliary information. After the terminal device reports the overheating auxiliary information once, the terminal device and the network device need to start the prohibition timer synchronously. During the process, the terminal device cannot report the auxiliary overheating information again, and can only report the auxiliary overheating information again when or after the prohibition timer expires.
  • the value of the prohibit timer specified in the existing agreement can be selected in a range, which is ⁇ s0,s0dot5,s1,s2,s5,s10,s20,s30,s60,s90,s120,s300,s600, spare3,spare2,spare1 ⁇ , where s means the unit is seconds, for example, s0 means 0 seconds, s1 means 1 second. s0dot5 means 0.5 seconds, and spare means reserved bits. For example, spare3, spare2, and spare mean three reserved bits.
  • the overheating configuration information sent by the network device to the terminal device may be included in one or more IEs, and the demand code corresponding to the one or more IEs may be needM.
  • the terminal device sends the auxiliary overheating information to the network device, and the network device receives the auxiliary overheating information from the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can send the overheating auxiliary information to the network device.
  • the terminal device can send overheating assistance to the network device information.
  • the terminal device may include the overheating assistance information in the UE assistance information message and send it to the network device.
  • the overheating assistance information that a terminal device can report may include one or more of the following: The maximum uplink secondary carrier supported by the terminal device (component carrier, The number of CC) or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells (secondary cells, SCell), the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device, the maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each frequency band supported, The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that a terminal device can support in each supported frequency band, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of the terminal device in each frequency band supported, or the terminal device The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell on each supported frequency band.
  • the overheating assistance information that the terminal device can report includes: the type of the terminal device (UE category), and/or the number of MIMO layers supported by the terminal device.
  • the network device sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the RRC reconfiguration message from the network device.
  • the network device can decide whether to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, thereby alleviating the overheating problem of the terminal device. As for how to make a decision, it depends on the internal implementation of the network equipment. If the network device decides to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, the network device can determine the configuration information according to the received overheating auxiliary information, and include the configuration information in the RRC reconfiguration message and send it to the terminal device. The terminal device can reduce the configuration information by applying the configuration information. The air interface configuration of the terminal device. After the terminal device uses the reduced air interface configuration for communication, the power consumption is reduced, and the temperature of the terminal device is also reduced, thereby solving the problem of overheating.
  • Cell handover can include cell handover within a base station and cell handover across base stations.
  • Inter-base station cell handover refers to when a terminal device moves from the coverage area of one base station (source base station) to the coverage area of another base station (target base station). The original communication connection of the terminal device will be changed and switched to another communication connection, so that the terminal device continues to maintain the communication connection with the base station.
  • the embodiments of the present application mainly consider cell handover across base stations, and the “cell handover” described below can be understood as “cell handover across base stations”.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of cell handover for terminal equipment. It can be seen from Figure 3 that the terminal equipment needs to be handed over from the source base station to the target base station.
  • Figure 4 again, which is a flow chart of the cell handover process. Figure 4 does not show the operation of the core network side.
  • the source base station sends a handover preparation information (handover preparation information) message to the target base station, and the target base station receives the handover preparation information message from the source base station.
  • the handover preparation information message is used to instruct the terminal device to be handed over from the source base station to the target base station.
  • the source base station Before the terminal device performs cell handover, that is, before performing S41, the source base station will issue configuration information to the terminal device, for example, called configuration information 1.
  • the configuration information 1 may include one or more IEs, and the configuration information 1 is used for The terminal equipment communicates under the source base station.
  • the source base station will send configuration information 1 to the target base station.
  • the source base station may include the configuration information 1 in the handover preparation information message and send it to the target base station.
  • the target base station performs admission control. That is, the target base station determines whether to allow the terminal device to switch to the target base station.
  • the target base station If the target base station allows the terminal device to switch to the target base station, the target base station sends a handover control (handover command) message to the source base station, and the source base station receives the handover control message from the target base station.
  • a handover control handover command
  • the handover control message may indicate that the target base station allows the terminal device to be handed over to the target base station.
  • the source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration (RRC reconfiguration) message to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the RRC reconfiguration message from the source base station.
  • RRC reconfiguration RRC reconfiguration
  • the RRC reconfiguration message may also be referred to as a handover command, which may instruct the terminal device to switch from the source base station to the target base station.
  • the target base station will also issue configuration information to the terminal device, for example called configuration information 2.
  • the configuration information 2 may include one or more IEs, and the configuration information 2 is used for the terminal device to communicate under the target base station.
  • the configuration information 2 may be determined according to the configuration information 1.
  • the target base station may include the configuration information 2 in the handover control message in S43 and send it to the source base station, and the source base station may then include the configuration information 2 in the RRC reconfiguration message in S44 and send it to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device performs a handover operation to switch from the source base station to the target base station, or in other words, switch from the current serving cell to the new cell.
  • the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete (RRC reconfiguration complete) message to the target base station, and the target base station receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the terminal device.
  • RRC reconfiguration complete RRC reconfiguration complete
  • the completion of RRC reconfiguration can indicate that the terminal device has been switched.
  • the terminal equipment completes the cell handover process. After the terminal device switches to the target base station, the configuration information 2 can be applied.
  • the communication version supported by each base station may be different, so the communication version of the source base station and the target base station may be different.
  • the communication version of the source base station may be higher than the communication version of the target base station. Since the base station of the higher version supports more functions than the base station of the lower version, the base station of the higher version can be configured with more IEs, but the base station of the lower version cannot recognize the IE corresponding to the new function because it does not have new functions. Since the target base station cannot recognize these IEs, it will not send these IEs to the terminal device. However, some IEs correspond to the demand code need M, such as the IE that includes overheating configuration information.
  • the terminal device If the terminal device received the IE last time, but did not receive the IE this time, it indicates that the terminal device needs to continue to apply the last received IE.
  • the configuration corresponding to this IE For this type of IE, if the terminal device determines that the source base station has sent the IE to the terminal device, but the target base station has not sent the IE to the terminal device, the terminal device will continue to use the configuration corresponding to the IE from the source base station. However, the target base station cannot recognize the IE, and naturally cannot support the configuration corresponding to the IE, which may cause the terminal device to fail to communicate normally under the target base station.
  • the first field is a field that needs to be inherited, that is, if the terminal device received the first field last time, but did not receive the first field this time, then the terminal device needs to continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field received last time , In other words, the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M. Then in this embodiment of the application, if the terminal device determines that the first configuration information from the first network device includes the first field, and the first configuration information from the second network device does not include the first field, the terminal device can release The configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information, that is, the terminal device no longer applies the previously received configuration corresponding to the first field.
  • the second network device did not send the first field to the terminal device. It is probably because the second network device cannot recognize the first field. Therefore, the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the first field, which can make the terminal device and the second network device apply The fields are kept consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
  • the smart phone may perform a cell handover due to the user's movement.
  • the smart phone may not be able to communicate normally when it is switched to the target base station, that is, the smart phone may have poor call signals, call interruptions, or call drops, which affects user experience.
  • the user’s movement may cause the smart phone to perform cell handover, but in the embodiment of this application, even if the smart phone is switched to the target Under the base station, since the actual configuration of the smart phone can be as consistent as possible with the configuration of the smart phone known by the target base station, the smart phone can also communicate normally under the target base station. That is to say, the technical solution provided by the embodiments of the present application can reduce the probability of poor call signal, call interruption, or call dropped after the smart phone performs cell handover, improve communication quality, and improve user experience. .
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application can be applied to the fourth generation mobile communication technology (the 4th generation, 4G) system, such as the LTE system, or can be applied to the 5G system, such as the NR system, or can also be applied to the next generation Mobile communication systems or other similar communication systems are not specifically restricted.
  • the 4th generation, 4G such as the LTE system
  • the 5G system such as the NR system
  • next generation Mobile communication systems or other similar communication systems are not specifically restricted.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application can be applied to device-to-device (D2D) scenarios, such as NR-D2D scenarios, etc., or can be applied to vehicle to everything (V2X) scenarios, such as NR-V2X scenes, etc., for example, can be applied to the Internet of Vehicles, such as V2X, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), etc., or can be used in fields such as intelligent driving, assisted driving, or intelligent networked vehicles.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • the base station in Figure 3 may be an access network device.
  • the access network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems.
  • a 4G system it can correspond to an eNB
  • a 5G system it corresponds to an access network equipment in 5G, such as gNB.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to future mobile communication systems, so the access network equipment can also correspond to network equipment in future mobile communication systems.
  • Figure 3 takes the access network equipment as a base station as an example.
  • the access network equipment may also be equipment such as RSU.
  • the configuration information described in the various embodiments of the present application can all include the parameters configured by the network device for the terminal device, so that the terminal The device can work under the network device.
  • the parameters configured by the network device for the terminal device may include one or more of radio bearer configuration parameters, physical layer parameters, MAC parameters, RLC parameters, or security parameters, or may also include other parameters.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a first method for configuring a terminal device. Please refer to FIG. 5, which is a flowchart of this method. In the following introduction process, the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 3 is taken as an example.
  • the first network device described below is the source network device of the terminal device, that is, the network device that the terminal device accesses before cell handover
  • the second network device described below is the target network device of the terminal device, that is, The network equipment that the terminal equipment accesses after the cell handover.
  • the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3
  • the first network device described below may be the source base station in the network architecture shown in FIG.
  • the second network device may be the target base station in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3.
  • the first network device sends third configuration information to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the third configuration information from the first network device.
  • the first network device as the source network device may send the third configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the first network device may send the third configuration information to the terminal device when the terminal device just enters the network (for example, when completing random access with the first network device), and after that, the terminal device is under the first network device When working, the first network device no longer sends other configuration information to the terminal device; or, the first network device can send configuration information to the terminal device when the terminal device just enters the network (for example, when completing random access with the first network device)
  • the first network device can also send new configuration information to the terminal device. For the first network device and the terminal device, it can be based on the new configuration information.
  • the configuration information of and the previous configuration information obtains the currently applied configuration information.
  • the third configuration information is the most recent configuration information sent by the first network device to the terminal device.
  • the first network device may also send the third configuration information to the terminal device during the cell handover process.
  • the source network device sends a handover command to the terminal device (the handover command is, for example, the RRC reconfiguration message in S44 in the process shown in Figure 4) to instruct the terminal
  • the first network device may include the third configuration information in the switching command and send it to the terminal device.
  • the current configuration process is iterative configuration, or the configuration of inheritance system, that is, the configuration of the next is based on the previous configuration.
  • the third configuration information is the configuration information that the first network device recently sent to the terminal device, or in other words, the first network device has already sent other configuration information to the terminal device before sending the third configuration information to the terminal device,
  • the fourth configuration information then the third configuration information is a further configuration based on the fourth configuration information. Therefore, the terminal device can determine the configuration information applied by the terminal device according to the third configuration information and the fourth configuration information,
  • the configuration information is referred to as the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device can be configured using the first configuration information, so that the terminal device can normally perform data communication under the first network device.
  • the first configuration information may include one or more fields, such as an IE, or a domain, or other concepts. It can be understood that a field includes one or more bits.
  • each field may correspond to a demand code, and the demand codes corresponding to different fields may be the same or different.
  • each field can include a parameter.
  • the first configuration information may include a first field, and the first field includes, for example, a parameter, or in other words, includes corresponding information.
  • the terminal device if the first field is not received, it needs to inherit (or apply) the content of the first field received last time, or in other words, it needs to continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the content of the first field received last time.
  • the first parameter needs to be applied continuously.
  • the first field is the field that needs to be inherited.
  • the first field may include overheating configuration information, or the first field may also include other information.
  • the overheating configuration information includes, for example, the first indication information, or includes the timing duration of the prohibition timer, or includes the first instruction information and the timing duration of the prohibition timer.
  • the first indication information may be used to indicate whether the auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device.
  • the prohibition timer is a prohibition timer related to overheating, and the prohibition timer can be used to control the frequency of the terminal device sending auxiliary information related to the overheating to the network device.
  • the terminal device may send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device, When sending the auxiliary information related to overheating or after sending the auxiliary information related to overheating, the terminal device starts the prohibition timer. Similarly, the network device receives the auxiliary information related to overheating or after receiving the auxiliary information related to overheating. , Also turn on the prohibit timer.
  • the terminal device cannot send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device, and the terminal device can only send the auxiliary information related to the overheating to the network device when the prohibition timer expires or after the timeout.
  • the value range of the timer duration of the prohibition timer can be ⁇ s0,s0dot5,s1,s2,s5,s10,s20,s30,s60,s90,s120,s300,s600,spare3,spare2,spare1 ⁇ , about For the related introduction of this range, please refer to the previous article.
  • the terminal device sends the auxiliary information related to overheating to the first network device, and the first network device receives the auxiliary information related to overheating from the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can send the overheating related information to the first network device.
  • Supplementary information if the overheating configuration information includes the first indication information and the timing duration of the prohibition timer, then, if the terminal device has an overheating problem and the prohibition timer is not running, the terminal device can send overheating related information to the first network device.
  • Supplementary information For example, the terminal device may include the auxiliary information related to overheating in the UE auxiliary information message and send it to the first network device.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating may include one or more of the following: the maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of uplink auxiliary cells supported by the terminal device, the maximum number of downlink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of downlink auxiliary carriers supported by the terminal device
  • the number of secondary cells the maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band, the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each frequency band supported, and the terminal device in each supported frequency band
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers supported by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum number of auxiliary cells in the downlink supported by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the terminal device's
  • the maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that each supported frequency band can support, and the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum aggregate bandwidth supported by the terminal device in each frequency band supported.
  • the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that can be supported by each frequency band, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of each frequency band supported by the terminal device, and the type information of the terminal device; or, auxiliary information related to overheating It can include the maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of uplink auxiliary cells supported by the terminal device, the maximum number of downlink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of downlink auxiliary cells supported by the terminal device, and the maximum uplink aggregation that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band Bandwidth, the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that each serving cell of each supported frequency band of the terminal device can support, and the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers supported by the terminal device in each frequency band supported.
  • the configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating (which can be understood as the value of the parameter included in the auxiliary information related to overheating) is the desired configuration of the terminal device, not the actual capability of the terminal device.
  • the supported configuration for example, the configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating, may be lower than or equal to the configuration actually supported by the capabilities of the terminal device. It can be understood that if the terminal device applies the configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating, the overheating of the terminal device can be improved.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each serving cell on each supported frequency band.
  • the number of MIMO layers is, for example, 2, which indicates that the terminal device expects the first network device Configure the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers supported by each serving cell of the terminal device in each supported frequency band to 2, but the terminal device can actually be able to support each serving cell in each supported frequency band.
  • the maximum number of MIMO layers supported in the uplink may be 4, that is, the terminal device expects to reduce the number of MIMO layers to improve the overheating of the terminal device.
  • each frequency band supported by the terminal device includes, for example, two frequency bands of high frequency (FR2) and low frequency (FR1), or more frequency bands may be divided according to a finer granularity.
  • FR2 high frequency
  • FR1 low frequency
  • the first network device sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the RRC reconfiguration message from the first network device.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message includes air interface configuration information. Because the cell handover process has not been involved at this time, the RRC reconfiguration message is not the RRC reconfiguration message in S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4.
  • the first network device can decide whether to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, thereby alleviating the overheating problem of the terminal device. As for how to make a decision, it depends on the internal implementation of the first network device. If the first network device decides to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, the first network device may determine the air interface configuration information according to the received auxiliary information related to overheating, and include the air interface configuration information in the RRC reconfiguration message and send it to the terminal device. After receiving the air interface configuration information, the terminal device can apply the air interface configuration information to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device.
  • the capability of the terminal device is the second capability
  • the capability of the terminal device is the first capability
  • the first capability is lower than the second capability.
  • the second capability is, for example, the maximum capability actually supported by the terminal device, or may also be lower than the maximum capability actually supported by the terminal device.
  • the power consumption is reduced, and the temperature of the terminal device is also reduced, thereby solving the problem of overheating.
  • the first network device may not need to send the air interface configuration information to the terminal device, for example, it may not be necessary to perform S53.
  • the parameters included in the air interface configuration information configured by the first network device and the parameters included in the auxiliary information related to overheating may be consistent.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of the terminal device in each supported frequency band, and the air interface configuration information also includes the terminal device's maximum number of MIMO layers in each supported frequency band. The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that each serving cell can support.
  • the value of the parameter included in the air interface configuration information and the value of the parameter included in the auxiliary information related to overheating may be the same or different.
  • the overheating-related auxiliary information includes the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of the terminal device in each supported frequency band is 2, and the terminal device has a maximum number of MIMO layers in each supported frequency band.
  • the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that a serving cell can actually support is 4.
  • the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of the terminal device in each supported frequency band included in the air interface configuration information may be two or three.
  • the first network device can determine the air interface configuration information completely according to the auxiliary information related to overheating, or the first network device can also consider other factors when determining the air interface configuration information, which makes the determined air interface configuration information not completely equivalent to overheating Recommendations for related auxiliary information.
  • the parameters included in the air interface configuration information configured by the first network device and the parameters included in the auxiliary information related to overheating may also be different.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each serving cell on each frequency band supported, and the air interface configuration information may not include this parameter, but includes the terminal device support Maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers. It can be seen that the first network device has certain flexibility in determining the air interface configuration information.
  • S52 and S53 are only optional steps, which are not necessary to be performed, and are represented by dashed lines in FIG. 5.
  • the first network device sends the third configuration information to the second network device, and the second network device receives the third configuration information from the first network device.
  • the first network device may include the third configuration information in the handover preparation information message described in S41 in the process shown in FIG. 4 and send it to the second network device, or may also include the third configuration information in other The message is sent to the second network device.
  • the second network device may determine the second configuration information according to the third configuration information, and the second configuration information may be used for communication of the terminal device under the second network device. For example, for some fields already included in the third configuration information, the second network device may reconfigure the contents of these fields (for example, reconfigure the values of the parameters included in these fields), or may not need to reconfigure, but continue Use the contents of these fields included in the third configuration information.
  • the second network device may include the field in the second configuration information, so that the terminal device receives the second configuration After the information, the configuration corresponding to the field included in the second configuration information will be applied; and if the second network device does not need to configure the content of the field, the second network device does not need to include the field in the second configuration information, After the terminal device receives the second configuration information and finds that the second configuration information does not include this field, but the first configuration information includes this field, the terminal device will continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information.
  • the second network device can be configured according to the characteristics of the corresponding demand codes. Similarly, for these fields, the second network device can choose to reconfigure or continue to use the third configuration information. The corresponding configuration of this field.
  • the communication version of the first network device is version 1
  • the communication version of the second network device is version 2
  • version 1 is v1540
  • version 2 is v1520, and so on.
  • version 1 is higher than version 2
  • version 2 is version 2
  • version 1 is v1540
  • version 2 is v1520
  • version 1 is higher than version 2
  • version 2 is v1520
  • version 1 is higher than version 2
  • version 2 for one or more fields included in the third configuration information, if some fields correspond to version 1, or correspond to other versions between version 1 and version 2, and do not correspond to version 2. It does not correspond to any other versions lower than version 2, and the second network device cannot recognize these fields, or in other words, cannot interpret these fields.
  • a network device cannot identify a field higher than the communication version supported by the network device.
  • the second network device does not include such fields in the second configuration information.
  • the second network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second configuration information from the second network device.
  • the second network device may first send the second configuration information to the first network device, and then the first network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the second network device may include the second configuration information in the handover control message described in S43 in the process shown in FIG. 4 and send it to the first network device, and the first network device may include the second configuration information as The RRC reconfiguration message described in S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4 is sent to the terminal device.
  • the first network device can send the third configuration information to the terminal device before the cell handover, or can send the third configuration information to the terminal device through the RRC reconfiguration message during the cell handover.
  • the first network device sends the third configuration information to the terminal device through the RRC reconfiguration message, and sends the second configuration information to the terminal device through the RRC reconfiguration message, the third configuration information and the second configuration information are passed through A message was sent.
  • the terminal device determines that the first configuration information includes the first field, and the second configuration information does not include the first field. Or, for some fields, if the content of the field is empty, the effect is the same as if the field is not included. That is, if the field is included in the configuration information, but the content of the field is empty, it can also be regarded as The configuration information does not include this field. For such a field, S56 may also be that the terminal device determines that the first configuration information includes the first field and the second configuration information also includes the first field, but the content of the first field included in the second configuration information is empty.
  • the embodiment of the present application mainly takes as an example the terminal device determining that the first configuration information includes the first field and the second configuration information does not include the first field.
  • the first field is a field that needs to be inherited. This can be understood as when the terminal device does not receive the first field, the terminal device needs to inherit the content of the first field received last time, or in other words, the terminal device needs to continue to apply The configuration corresponding to the first field received this time. Or it is understood that the first field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the first field received last time when the configuration information newly received by the terminal device (for example, the second configuration information) does not include the first field. For example, the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M.
  • the terminal device can compare the second configuration information with the first configuration information to determine the configuration information that should actually be applied . For example, if the second network device cannot identify some of the fields included in the first network device, the second configuration information will not include this portion of the fields. And these fields may have fields that need to be inherited (for example, the first field). Since the second configuration information does not include such fields, the terminal device will continue to apply the configuration corresponding to such fields included in the first configuration information. The configuration corresponding to this type of field is not supported by the second network device.
  • the terminal device may cause the terminal device to communicate under the second network device.
  • the problem for example, the terminal device may not be able to perform normal data communication with the second network device. Therefore, in this embodiment of the application, the terminal device may determine that the first configuration information includes fields that are not included in the second configuration information. For example, the terminal device may determine one or more such fields, and the one or more fields may include the first configuration information. One field. Among them, for the same field, it will have the same identifier, and the terminal device can determine whether the configuration information includes the corresponding field according to the identifier of the field.
  • the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information, or in other words, releases the content of the first field included in the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device can determine the demand code corresponding to the field, and if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field does not need to be inherited For example, if the demand code of this field is need N, the terminal device may not take corresponding actions; or, if the demand code of this field is need R, the terminal device may release the configuration corresponding to this field.
  • the terminal device can release such a field
  • the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information that is, the terminal device will not continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device does not need to determine the communication version corresponding to the field, as long as a field is included in the first configuration information and not included in the second configuration information, and the field is a field that needs to be inherited, the terminal device can The configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information is released, so that the terminal device no longer applies the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information. It can be understood that the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the field.
  • the first field includes overheating configuration information, and the demand code corresponding to the first field is needM.
  • the first field is included in the first configuration information, but is not included in the second configuration information. Then the terminal device can release the content of the first field included in the first configuration information, so that the terminal device no longer applies the overheating configuration information included in the first field included in the first configuration information.
  • the fields not included in the second configuration information are likely to be fields that the second network device cannot recognize. If the terminal device inherits the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information, it is likely that the terminal device cannot communicate normally under the second network device. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device does not inherit the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information, so that the actual configuration of the terminal device corresponds to the configuration of the terminal device understood by the second network device, ensuring that the terminal device Data communication can be carried out normally under the second network device.
  • the terminal device may also determine the communication version corresponding to the field (for example, the field may include a version number, so that the terminal device may determine the communication version corresponding to a field), and then perform corresponding processing. For example, for each field in one or more fields that are included in the first configuration information but not included in the second configuration information, the terminal device may determine the demand code corresponding to the field, and if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field is not Fields that need to be inherited, for example, if the demand code of this field is need N, the terminal device may not take corresponding actions; or, if the demand code of this field is need R, the terminal device may release the configuration corresponding to this field.
  • the demand code corresponding to the field for example, the field may include a version number, so that the terminal device may determine the communication version corresponding to a field
  • the terminal device may determine the demand code corresponding to the field, and if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field is not Fields that need to be inherited, for example,
  • the terminal device can further determine whether the second network device can support the first version.
  • the method for the terminal device to determine whether the second network device can support the first version may include: determining whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to the first version (for example, the terminal device may determine that the second information includes other than the first version).
  • the terminal device can determine that the second network device can support the first version corresponding to the first field.
  • the reason why the second configuration information does not include the first field may be that the second network device thinks that the terminal device needs Continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information. Therefore, in this case, the terminal device does not need to release the content of the first field included in the first configuration information, but can continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device can try not to release the content included in the fields that the second network device can support, so that the configuration of the terminal device and the second network device are consistent, and ensure that the terminal device can perform normally under the second network device. data communication.
  • the terminal device cannot determine whether the second network device supports the first field Corresponding to the first version, but if the second network device does not actually support the first version, if the terminal device continues to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information, it may cause the terminal device to be on the second network device
  • the terminal device may not be able to perform normal data communication with the second network device. Therefore, in this case, the terminal device may release the content of the first field included in the first configuration information of the first field, and no longer continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information. In this way, the configuration of the terminal device and the second network device are kept consistent, and it is ensured that the terminal device can perform normal data communication under the second network device.
  • the terminal device may determine whether the second configuration information includes a field corresponding to the v1540 version or corresponding to any other version higher than the v1540 version.
  • overheatingConfig such as other configuration (OtherConfig)-v1540 or overheating assistant configuration (overheatingAssistanceConfig), etc.
  • the overheating configuration information is included in the first field
  • the first field is, for example, an IE.
  • the terminal device may determine whether the second configuration information includes a field corresponding to the v1540 version or corresponding to any other version higher than the v1540 version.
  • the second configuration information includes a field corresponding to the v1540 version, or includes a field corresponding to any other version higher than v1540, it means that the second network device can support the v1540 version, or can support other versions higher than v1540 Version, the second network device can also support the first field.
  • the terminal device does not have to release the content of the first field included in the first configuration information, that is, the overheating configuration information is not released, but can continue to apply the first field.
  • the overheating configuration information included in the configuration information if the second configuration information neither includes a field corresponding to the v1540 version nor any other version higher than v1540, the terminal device cannot determine the communication version of the second network device, nor can it determine the first 2. Whether the network device can support the communication version corresponding to the first field. In this case, for the sake of safety, the terminal device may release the overheating configuration information included in the first configuration information, and no longer apply the overheating configuration information.
  • the terminal device adjusts the capability of the terminal device from the first capability to the second capability. Among them, the first ability is lower than the second ability.
  • the terminal device can apply the air interface configuration information to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device. For example, before the air interface configuration is reduced, the capability of the terminal device is the second capability, and after the air interface configuration is reduced, the capability of the terminal device is the first capability, and the first capability is lower than the second capability.
  • the air interface configuration information includes the number of antennas of the terminal device.
  • the number of antennas of the terminal device is 4, and the second capability is the 4-antenna capability.
  • the number of antennas of the terminal device If it becomes 2, the first capability is the 2-antenna capability. It can be seen that the first capability is lower than the second capability.
  • the first capability may be considered as configured by the first network device to adapt to the content of the first field, or in other words, configured by the first network device to adapt the auxiliary information related to overheating received according to the first field.
  • the second capability may be the maximum capability supported by the terminal device, for example, the maximum capability that the terminal device reports to the network through the UE capability information message when it enters the network, or the second capability may also be lower than the maximum capability supported by the terminal device and higher than the maximum capability supported by the terminal device. Any ability of an ability. After the terminal device uses the reduced air interface configuration for communication, the power consumption is reduced, and the temperature of the terminal device is also reduced, thereby solving the problem of overheating.
  • the second network device may not support the communication version corresponding to the first field, that is, the target network device cannot recognize the first field, so the second network device naturally cannot learn about the terminal device.
  • the ability is adjusted according to the first field. Therefore, the terminal device can adjust the capability of the terminal device back to the second capability, so that the second network device can schedule the terminal device according to the second capability, reducing the ability of the terminal device and the actual application of the terminal device as understood by the second network device.
  • the probability of scheduling errors caused by inconsistent capabilities For example, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that a terminal device corresponding to the first capability can support in each serving cell in each supported frequency band is 2, while the terminal device corresponding to the second capability is in each supported frequency band.
  • the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell is 4, and the terminal device can adjust the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell on each frequency band supported by the terminal device from 2 to 4.
  • the configuration mode applied by the second network device is the configuration mode of inheritance system, or iterative configuration mode, that is, the configuration mode of the next time needs to be performed based on the previous configuration, for example, based on
  • the third configuration information of the first network device determines the second configuration information, that is, the second configuration information is not configured in a full configuration manner.
  • the second network device may also adopt a full configuration method, which is a method in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
  • the second network device adopts the full configuration method, after the second network device receives the third configuration information from the third network device, if it is determined that the third configuration information includes a field that the second network device cannot recognize, then The second network device will clean up (for example, discard) all the parameters (or all fields) configured by the first network device for the terminal device, and reconfigure all the fields that need to be configured for the terminal device.
  • the first The second configuration information is brand new configuration information configured by the second network device for the terminal device, and has nothing to do with the third configuration information. This method can also ensure that the terminal device and the second network device have the same understanding of the configuration information, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the configuration mode adopted by the second network device. However, if the second network device adopts the full configuration mode, for the terminal device, there is no need to perform the behavior of releasing the fields that need to be inherited.
  • the second network device may send configuration instruction information to the first network device, and the first network device may receive configuration instruction information from the second network device.
  • the configuration instruction information may indicate that the second network device uses the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, or indicates that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device.
  • the configuration instruction information may be sent to the first network device before the cell handover. For example, before the first network device sends a handover preparation information message (S41 in the process shown in FIG.
  • the second network The device may send the configuration instruction information to the first network device, or the second network device may send the configuration instruction information to the first network device before sending the second configuration information to the terminal device, or the second network device may also send the configuration instruction information to the first network device.
  • the configuration instruction information is sent together with the second configuration information.
  • the first network device may send the configuration instruction information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can receive the configuration instruction information.
  • the first network device may include the configuration indication information in the RRC reconfiguration message (S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4) and send it to the terminal device.
  • the configuration instruction information indicates that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, you can continue to implement the technical solution provided in the embodiment of this application; and if the configuration instruction information indicates that the second network device uses the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, then It is not necessary to implement the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application. For example, if the configuration instruction information instructs the second network device to configure the terminal device in the full configuration mode, after receiving the second configuration information, the terminal device can apply all or part of the configuration included in the second configuration information. The configuration information of a network device (for example, the first configuration information) can be discarded by the terminal device.
  • a network device for example, the first configuration information
  • the embodiment of the present application can continue to perform the cell handover process. For example, if the first network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device through a handover command, the terminal device can continue to perform the process shown in FIG. 4 S45 and other steps.
  • the terminal device can release the first field.
  • the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the configuration information that is, the terminal device no longer applies the previously received configuration corresponding to the first field.
  • the second network device did not send the first field to the terminal device. It is probably because the second network device cannot recognize the first field. Therefore, the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the first field, which can make the terminal device and the second network device apply The fields are kept consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a second method for configuring a terminal device. Please refer to FIG. 6, which is a flowchart of this method.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of this method.
  • the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 3 is taken as an example.
  • the first network device described below is the source network device of the terminal device, that is, the network device that the terminal device accesses before cell handover
  • the second network device described below is the target network device of the terminal device, that is, The network equipment that the terminal equipment accesses after the cell handover.
  • the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3
  • the first network device described below may be the source base station in the network architecture shown in FIG.
  • the second network device may be the target base station in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3.
  • the second network device sends version indication information to the first network device, and the first network device receives the version indication information from the second network device.
  • the version indication information may indicate the communication version of the second network device, for example, the communication version of the second network device is the second version.
  • S61 can be performed before the cell handover is performed.
  • the second network device may send version indication information to the first network device.
  • the first network device determines that the second version is lower than the first version.
  • the first version is the communication version of the first network device.
  • the first version is v1540
  • the second version is v1520
  • the first version is v1540
  • the second version is v1530, and so on.
  • the first network device sends the first information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the first information from the first network device.
  • the first information may be used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field.
  • the first field is a field that needs to be inherited.
  • the first field is a field that the terminal device needs to keep the content of the first field received last time when the configuration information newly received by the terminal device does not include the first field, for example, the first field
  • the corresponding demand code is need M.
  • S63 may also occur before the cell handover. For example, before the first network device sends the handover preparation information message to the second network device (S41 in the process shown in FIG. 4), the first network device sends the first network device to the terminal device. information.
  • a network device cannot identify fields corresponding to other communication versions that are higher than the communication version of the network device.
  • the terminal device works under the first network device, and the first network device sends corresponding configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the first network device sends configuration information 1 to the terminal device, and the terminal device according to the configuration information 1
  • the configuration information 2 can be obtained, and configuration can be performed according to the configuration information 2, so that it can communicate with the first network device normally.
  • the process for the terminal device to obtain the configuration information 2 according to the configuration information 1 refer to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 (wherein, the "first configuration information" in the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. One name is replaced with “configuration information 2" here, and the name “third configuration information” in the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 is replaced with "configuration information 1" here).
  • the first network device will also send configuration information 1 to the second network device, and the second network device can determine the configuration of the second network device to the terminal device according to the configuration information 1, for example, called configuration information 3. .
  • the configuration information 1 includes the fields corresponding to the first version, and the fields corresponding to the other versions between the first version and the second version. Field, the second network device cannot recognize it.
  • the configuration information 3 determined by the second network device will not include this part of the fields. And these fields may have fields that need to be inherited (such as the first field).
  • the terminal device Since the configuration information 3 from the second network device does not include such fields, the terminal device will continue to apply the configuration information from the first network device (such as the configuration Information 2) The configuration corresponding to such fields included. The configuration corresponding to this type of field is not supported by the second network device. If the terminal device continues the configuration corresponding to this type of field included in the configuration information 2, it may cause communication problems for the terminal device under the second network device. For example, the terminal device may not be able to perform normal data communication with the second network device.
  • the first network device can instruct the terminal device to release all or part of it by sending the first information to the terminal device.
  • the configuration corresponding to the field that needs to be inherited (in other words, release all or part of the content included in the field that needs to be inherited).
  • All or part of the fields that need to be inherited may be the fields included in the configuration information 2. That is, the first network device may instruct the terminal device to release the configuration corresponding to all or part of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information 2.
  • the first field is one of all or part of the fields that need to be inherited.
  • the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information may include second indication information, or include the timing duration of the prohibit timer, or include the second Indication information and the timing duration of the prohibition timer.
  • the second indication information can be used to indicate whether the auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device.
  • the terminal device cannot send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  • all or part of the fields that need to be inherited may include fields corresponding to the first version, including fields corresponding to other versions between the first version and the second version, or It includes fields corresponding to the second version, and may also include fields corresponding to other versions lower than the second version.
  • the first indication information can instruct the terminal device to release the fields that need to be inherited corresponding to v1540, release the fields that need to be inherited corresponding to v1530, and release the need to inherit fields corresponding to v1520. And release the fields corresponding to v1510 that need to be inherited.
  • the first network device does not determine the version corresponding to the field, nor does it need to determine the specific version of the second network device.
  • the configuration information 2 includes Regardless of whether the second network device supports the fields that need to be inherited, the first network device can also instruct the terminal device to release it. In this way, the terminal device will no longer inherit these fields, so that the terminal device and the second network device have the same understanding of the fields, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
  • all or part of the fields that need to be inherited may include fields corresponding to the first version, including fields corresponding to other versions between the first version and the second version, but It does not include the fields corresponding to the second version, nor does it include the fields corresponding to other versions lower than the second version. Because the communication version of the second network device is the second version, no matter the fields corresponding to the second version or the fields corresponding to other versions lower than the second version, the second network device can support. If the first network device includes these fields in the configuration information and sends it to the second network device, the second network device can be identified and can also make further configurations based on these fields.
  • the first network device needs to determine the specific version of the second network device, and also the version corresponding to the field.
  • the first network device just instructs the terminal device to release the field corresponding to the first version, and release the field corresponding to the first version.
  • Fields of other versions between the first version and the second version, or the first network device instructs to release the fields higher than the second version, but does not need to release the fields corresponding to the second version, and does not need to release the fields corresponding to the lower version Fields corresponding to other versions of the second version.
  • This can also make the second network device and the terminal device have consistent understanding of the configuration information, and the terminal device needs to release fewer fields, which can reduce the workload of the terminal device.
  • the second network device can also perform further configuration, which helps reduce the workload of the second network device.
  • the first information can be implemented in different ways.
  • the first information may be configuration information.
  • the first information may be obtained according to the configuration information 2. All or part of the fields that need to be inherited in the configuration information 2
  • the content of each field of is set as the first content, and the configuration information obtained from this can be the first information.
  • the first content may indicate the release of the corresponding field.
  • the configuration information 2 includes the first field
  • the first information also includes the first field, and the content of the first field is the first content, and the first content is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field, or to indicate To release the content of the first field, it can also be understood that the content of the first field is the first content, that is, the content of the first field is set to "release".
  • the terminal device receives the first information, according to the first content included in the first field, the content of the first field included in the configuration information 2 stored on the terminal device side will be released, so that the content included in the configuration information 2 is no longer applied.
  • the configuration information is used to instruct to release all or part of the fields included in the configuration information 2 that need to be inherited.
  • This indication method is relatively clear for the terminal device, and the terminal device can determine which fields need to be released according to the fields included in the first information.
  • the first information may be indication information, for example referred to as first indication information, and the first indication information may occupy one or more bits.
  • the first indication information may indicate to release the configuration corresponding to one or more fields, and the first field is, for example, one of the one or more fields.
  • the first indication information occupies one bit. If the value of this bit is "0", it means that the configuration corresponding to one or more fields is released. If the value of this field is "1", it means that the configuration is not released.
  • the first indication information may occupy one or more bits. If the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device, it means that the configuration corresponding to one or more fields is released.
  • Sending the first indication information means that the configuration corresponding to one or more fields is not released.
  • These one or more fields are all fields that need to be inherited.
  • These one or more fields are all or part of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information 2. That is to say, the first indication information is used to indicate the release of the configuration information 2 All or part of the included fields need to be inherited.
  • the terminal device can release all or part of the content of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information 2 stored on the terminal device side, so that the configuration corresponding to these fields included in the configuration information 2 is no longer applied.
  • the field released by the terminal device includes the first field.
  • the first network device does not need to resend the configuration information to the terminal device, but only needs to send the first indication information to the terminal device to instruct the release of the corresponding field.
  • the information amount of the first indication information is small, which helps to save transmission overhead.
  • the first network device sends the first configuration information to the second network device, and correspondingly, the second network device receives the first configuration information from the first network device.
  • the first network device may include the first configuration information in a handover preparation information message (for example, S41 in the process shown in FIG. 4) and send it to the second network device.
  • the first network device may obtain the first configuration information according to the configuration information 2. For example, the first network device deletes all or part of the fields that need to be inherited from the configuration information 2, and the configuration information obtained therefrom may be the first configuration information.
  • the fields deleted by the first network device from the configuration information 2 are the fields that the first network device instructs the terminal device to release.
  • the fields deleted by the first network device may include fields corresponding to all versions, and all versions here include the first version, the second version, other versions between the first version and the second version, and Other versions lower than the second version.
  • the first network device deletes the first field from the configuration information 2
  • the first configuration information does not include the first field.
  • the first field may correspond to any one of all versions.
  • the fields deleted by the first network device only include the fields corresponding to the first version and the fields corresponding to other versions between the first version and the second version, but do not include the fields corresponding to the second version, nor Include fields corresponding to other versions lower than the first version.
  • the first network device deletes the first field from the configuration information 2
  • the first configuration information does not include the first field.
  • the first field may correspond to the second version, or correspond to the second version and the second version. Other versions between one version.
  • the second network device After obtaining the first configuration information, the second network device can configure the terminal device according to the first configuration information. Since the first configuration information does not include fields that need to be inherited that the second network device cannot recognize, the second network device can configure the terminal device normally. For example, the second network device may obtain the second configuration information. For example, the second configuration information may be obtained according to the first configuration information. For fields that need to be inherited that can be supported by the second network device, if the second network device needs to be configured, the field may be included in the second configuration information.
  • the second network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second configuration information from the second network device.
  • the second network device After the second network device obtains the second configuration information, it can be sent to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can configure according to the second configuration information so as to be able to communicate normally under the second network device after switching to the second network device.
  • the second network device may first send the second configuration information to the first network device, and then the first network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the second network device may include the second configuration information in the handover control message described in S43 in the process shown in FIG. 4 and send it to the first network device, and the first network device may include the second configuration information as The RRC reconfiguration message described in S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4 is sent to the terminal device.
  • the first network device sends a switching command to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the switching command from the first network device.
  • the handover command is, for example, the RRC reconfiguration message described in S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4, which can be used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the second network device.
  • the steps such as S45 in the flow shown in FIG. 4 can be continued, that is, the cell handover process can be continued.
  • the first network device can include the second configuration information in the RRC reconfiguration message described in S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4 and send it to the terminal device, then S66 can actually be regarded as being included in S65.
  • the configuration mode applied by the second network device is the configuration mode of inheritance system, or iterative configuration mode, that is, the configuration mode of the next time needs to be performed based on the previous configuration, for example, based on
  • the first configuration information of the first network device determines the second configuration information, that is, the second configuration information is not configured in a full configuration manner.
  • the second network device may also adopt a full configuration mode, which is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
  • the full configuration mode reference may be made to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
  • the embodiment of this application does not limit the configuration method adopted by the second network device, but if the second network device adopts the full configuration method, for the first network device, there is no need to instruct the terminal device to release the fields that need to be inherited .
  • the second network device may send configuration instruction information to the first network device, and the first network device may receive configuration instruction information from the second network device.
  • the configuration instruction information may indicate that the second network device uses the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, or indicates that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device.
  • the sending mode of the configuration indication information reference may be made to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
  • the first network device can send the terminal device Send the first information; and if the configuration instruction information indicates that the second network device uses the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application may not be executed. For example, the first network device does not need to send the first information to the terminal device.
  • the first network device determines that the communication version of the second network device is lower than the communication version of the first network device, it can instruct the terminal device to release all or part of the configuration corresponding to the fields that need to be inherited. In this way, the terminal The device no longer applies the configuration corresponding to these fields previously received. In this way, the application fields of the terminal device and the target network device can be kept consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the target network device.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 700 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication apparatus 700 is a terminal device 700, for example.
  • the terminal device 700 is, for example, the terminal device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
  • the terminal device 700 includes a processing module 710 and a receiving module 730.
  • the terminal device 700 may further include a sending module 720.
  • the terminal device 700 may be a terminal device, or may be a chip applied in the terminal device or other combination devices, components, etc. having the above-mentioned terminal device functions.
  • the transmitting module 720 may be a transmitter, the transmitter may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., the receiving module 730 may be a receiver, and the receiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., where the transmitter and The receiver may be different modules, or the transmitter and receiver may be set in the same functional module, which may be called a transceiver, and the processing module 710 may be a processor (or processing circuit), such as baseband processing
  • the baseband processor may include one or more central processing units (central processing units, CPUs).
  • the sending module 720 may be a radio frequency unit, and the receiving module may also be a radio frequency unit, where the transmitter and receiver may be different modules, or the transmitter and receiver
  • the processor may be arranged in the same functional module, the functional module may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 710 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor.
  • the sending module 720 may be the output interface of the chip (for example, a baseband chip), and the receiving module 730 may be the input interface of the chip (or, if the input interface and the output interface can be the same interface, it is considered that the transmission
  • the module 720 and the receiving module 730 are the same functional module, that is, the input and output interface of the chip.
  • the processing module 710 may be a processor (or a processing circuit) of the chip system, and the processor may include one or more central processing units.
  • processing module 710 in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by a processor or processor-related circuit components (or processing circuits)
  • the receiving module 730 may be implemented by a transceiver or transceiver-related circuit components
  • the sending module 720 may be implemented by The transmitter or transmitter-related circuit components are implemented.
  • the processing module 710 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S56 to S58, and/or other operations used to support the technology described herein. process.
  • the sending module 720 may be used to perform all the sending operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S52, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the receiving module 730 may be used to perform all receiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S51, S53, and S55, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the sending module 720 and the receiving module 730 may be a functional module, which can complete both the sending operation and the receiving operation.
  • the functional module can be called a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module can be used to perform the All the sending and receiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment, for example, when performing the sending operation, the transceiver module can be considered as the sending module, and when performing the receiving operation, the transceiver module can be considered as the receiving module; or
  • the module 720 and the receiving module 730 can also be two functional modules.
  • the transceiver module can also be regarded as a collective term for these two functional modules.
  • the sending module 720 is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending module 720 can be used to perform the operation shown in FIG. 5
  • the receiving module 730 is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving module 730 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
  • the processing module 710 is configured to determine first configuration information of the first network device before the cell handover, and the first network device is the source network device from which the terminal device 700 performs the cell handover;
  • the receiving module 730 is configured to receive second configuration information from a second network device during the cell handover process, where the second network device is a target network device for the terminal device 700 to perform the cell handover;
  • the processing module 710 is further configured to determine that the first configuration information includes a first field, and the second configuration information does not include the first field, where the first field is the first field received by the terminal device 700 When the second configuration information does not include the first field, the terminal device 700 needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time;
  • the processing module 710 is further configured to release the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information.
  • the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information includes:
  • First indication information where the first indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
  • the timing duration of the prohibition timer wherein the terminal device 700 cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device within the running time of the prohibition timer.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
  • the maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device 700 can support in each supported frequency band or,
  • Type information of the terminal device 700 is not limited.
  • the processing module 710 is further configured to determine that the second configuration information does not include a field corresponding to the first version before releasing the first field included in the first configuration information , And does not include a field corresponding to any version higher than the first version, and the first version is the communication version corresponding to the first field.
  • the processing module 710 is further configured to adjust the capability of the terminal device 700 from a first capability to a second capability, where the first capability is lower than the second capability, and the first capability is lower than the second capability.
  • a capability is configured by the first network device to adapt the content of the first field.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 800 provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication apparatus 800 is, for example, the first network device 800.
  • the first network device 800 is, for example, the network device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6.
  • the first network device 800 includes a processing module 810 and a sending module 820.
  • the first network device 800 further includes a receiving module 830.
  • the first network device 800 may be a network device (for example, an access network device), and may also be a chip applied to the network device or other combination devices or components having the function of the first network device described above.
  • the sending module 820 may be a transmitter, the transmitter may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the receiving module 830 may be a receiver, and the receiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., where the transmitter The transmitter and the receiver may be different modules, or the transmitter and the receiver may be provided in the same functional module, which may be called a transceiver
  • the processing module 810 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), for example Baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or more CPUs.
  • the sending module 820 may be a radio frequency unit, and the receiving module may also be a radio frequency unit, where the transmitter and receiver may be different modules, or, The transmitter and the receiver may be arranged in the same functional module, the functional module may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 810 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor.
  • the sending module 820 may be the output interface of the chip (for example, a baseband chip), and the receiving module 830 may be the input interface of the chip (or, if the input interface and the output interface can be the same interface, then It is considered that the sending module 820 and the receiving module 830 are the same functional module, that is, the input and output interface of the chip, and the processing module 810 may be the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip system, and the processor may include one or more central processing units. .
  • processing module 810 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or processor-related circuit components (or processing circuits)
  • receiving module 830 may be implemented by a transceiver or transceiver-related circuit components
  • sending module 820 may be implemented by The transmitter or transmitter-related circuit components are implemented.
  • the processing module 810 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operation performed by the first network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S62, and/or other operations used to support the technology described herein. process.
  • the sending module 820 may be used to perform all the sending operations performed by the first network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S63, S64, and S66, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the receiving module 830 may be used to perform all receiving operations performed by the first network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S61, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 810 is configured to determine that the second version is lower than the first version, the first version is the communication version of the first network device 800, and the second version is the communication version corresponding to the second network device.
  • the network device 800 is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
  • the sending module 820 is configured to send first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used to instruct to release the configuration corresponding to the first field, where the first field is when the configuration information received by the terminal device is not When the first field is included, the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time;
  • the sending module 820 is further configured to send a switching command to the terminal device, where the switching command is used to instruct to switch from the first network device 800 to the second network device.
  • the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to another version between the first version and the second version.
  • the first information is used to indicate to release the configuration corresponding to the first field, including:
  • the first information includes the first field, and the content of the first field is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field; or,
  • the first information is first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to one or more fields
  • the one or more fields include the first field
  • the one or more fields include the first field
  • Each field in the field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the field received last time when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the field.
  • the sending module 820 is further configured to send first configuration information to the second network device, where the first configuration information includes fields configured by the first network device 800 for the terminal device, And the first configuration information does not include the first field.
  • the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information includes:
  • Second indication information where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
  • the timing duration of the prohibition timer wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
  • the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device is the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device
  • the maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band or,
  • Type information of the terminal device is not limited.
  • the receiving module 830 is configured to receive version indication information from the second network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate that the communication version of the second network device is the second network device. Version.
  • the receiving module 830 is configured to receive configuration indication information from the second network device, where the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the For the terminal device, the full configuration mode is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 900 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 900 is, for example, the second network device 900.
  • the second network device 900 is, for example, the network device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6.
  • the second network device 900 includes a sending module 920 and a receiving module 930.
  • the second network device 900 further includes a processing module 910.
  • the second network device 900 may be a network device (for example, an access network device), or may be a chip applied to the network device or other combination devices or components having the function of the second network device described above.
  • the sending module 920 may be a transmitter, the transmitter may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the receiving module 930 may be a receiver, and the receiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., where the transmitter The transmitter and the receiver may be different modules, or the transmitter and the receiver may be set in the same functional module, which may be called a transceiver
  • the processing module 910 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), for example Baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or more CPUs.
  • the sending module 920 may be a radio frequency unit, and the receiving module may also be a radio frequency unit, where the transmitter and receiver may be different modules, or, The transmitter and the receiver may be provided in the same functional module, the functional module may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 910 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor.
  • the sending module 920 may be the output interface of the chip (for example, a baseband chip), and the receiving module 930 may be the input interface of the chip (or, if the input interface and the output interface may be the same interface, then It is considered that the sending module 920 and the receiving module 930 are the same functional module, that is, the input and output interface of the chip, and the processing module 910 may be the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip system, and the processor may include one or more central processing units. .
  • processing module 910 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or processor-related circuit components (or processing circuits)
  • receiving module 930 may be implemented by a transceiver or transceiver-related circuit components
  • sending module 920 may be implemented by The transmitter or transmitter-related circuit components are implemented.
  • the processing module 910 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operation performed by the second network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as the operation of determining the second configuration information, and/or to support the text Other processes of the described technique.
  • the sending module 920 may be used to perform all the sending operations performed by the second network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S61 and S65, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the receiving module 930 may be used to perform all receiving operations performed by the second network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S64, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the sending module 920 is configured to send version indication information to the first network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate a second version, and the second version is a communication version of the second network device 900;
  • the receiving module 930 is configured to receive first configuration information from the first network device, where the first configuration information includes fields configured by the first network device for the terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include the first configuration information.
  • a field the first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device 900 is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover, wherein the first field is
  • the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time.
  • the first field corresponds to a first version, or corresponds to another version between the first version and the second version, and the first version is the first network The communication version of the device, wherein the second version is lower than the first version.
  • the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  • the overheating configuration information includes:
  • Second indication information where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
  • the timing duration of the prohibition timer wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  • the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
  • the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device is the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device
  • the maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band or,
  • Type information of the terminal device is not limited.
  • the sending module 920 is further configured to send configuration indication information to the first network device, where the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device 900 has not configured the terminal in a full configuration mode Device, the full configuration mode is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
  • the sending module 920 is further configured to send second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information includes fields configured by the second network device 900 for the terminal device, and The second configuration information is obtained according to the first configuration information.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, and the communication device may be a terminal device or a circuit.
  • the communication device can be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 10 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate.
  • the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal equipment includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signal and radio frequency signal and the processing of radio frequency signal.
  • the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal devices may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 10 only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 10. In an actual terminal device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and radio frequency circuit with transceiving functions can be regarded as the transceiving unit of the terminal device (the transceiving unit can be a functional unit that can realize the sending and receiving functions; alternatively, the transceiving unit can also be It includes two functional units, namely a receiving unit capable of realizing the receiving function and a transmitting unit capable of realizing the transmitting function), and the processor with the processing function is regarded as the processing unit of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1010 and a processing unit 1020.
  • the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and so on.
  • the processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and so on.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1010 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1010 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1010 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the transceiver unit may sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may sometimes be referred to as a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit.
  • the sending unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
  • transceiving unit 1010 can be used to perform the sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the embodiment shown in FIG. Other operations.
  • the device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit and/or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit is an integrated processor or microprocessor or integrated circuit.
  • the device shown in FIG. 11 can be referred to.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the terminal device 700 in FIG. 7.
  • the processing module 710 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 1110 in FIG. 11 and complete the corresponding function
  • the sending module 720 in the foregoing embodiment may be the data sending processor 1120 in FIG. 11 and complete the corresponding function
  • the receiving module 730 in the above-mentioned embodiment may be the receiving data processor 1130 in FIG. 11, and complete the corresponding function.
  • the channel encoder and the channel decoder are shown in FIG. 11, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, and are only illustrative.
  • the processing device 1200 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem.
  • the communication device in this embodiment can be used as a modulation subsystem therein.
  • the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1203 and an interface 1204.
  • the processor 1203 completes the functions of the aforementioned processing module 710
  • the interface 1204 completes the aforementioned functions of the sending module 720 and the receiving module 730.
  • the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1206, a processor 1203, and a program stored on the memory 1206 and running on the processor.
  • the processor 1203 executes the program on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment. Methods.
  • the memory 1206 can be non-volatile or volatile, and its location can be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1200, as long as the memory 1206 can be connected to the The processor 1203 is fine.
  • the device 1300 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1310 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as digital unit, digital unit, DU) 1320 .
  • the RRU 1310 may be referred to as a transceiver module, and the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module, or the transceiver module may be a module capable of implementing sending and receiving functions.
  • the transceiver module may correspond to the sending module 820 and the receiving module 830 in FIG. 8.
  • the transceiver module may correspond to the sending module 920 and the receiving module 930 in FIG. 9.
  • the transceiver module may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 1311 and a radio frequency unit 1312.
  • the RRU 1310 part is mainly used for receiving and sending radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment.
  • the 1320 part of the BBU is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the base station, and so on.
  • the RRU 1310 and the BBU 1320 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 1320 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing module. It may correspond to the processing module 810 in FIG. 8, or may correspond to the processing module 910 in FIG. 9, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel Encoding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc.
  • the BBU processing module
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
  • the BBU 1320 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 1320 also includes a memory 1321 and a processor 1322.
  • the memory 1321 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 1322 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 1321 and the processor 1322 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication system.
  • the first communication system may include the terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 described above.
  • the terminal device is, for example, the terminal device 700 in FIG. 7.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication system.
  • the second communication system may include the first network device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 and the second network device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 described above.
  • the first network device is, for example, the first network device 800 in FIG. 8.
  • the second network device is, for example, the second network device 900 in FIG. 9.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 5 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the terminal device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 6 provided by the foregoing method embodiment The process related to the first network device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 6 provided by the foregoing method embodiment The process related to the second network device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. The process related to the first network device.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. The process related to the second network device.
  • processors mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a CPU, other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), ready-made Field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), a Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the processor is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, or discrete hardware component
  • the memory storage module
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the latter part of the technical solution of the present application can all be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer). , A server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer.
  • computer-readable media may include random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), and electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically erasable programmable read-only memory).
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • USB flash disk universal serial bus flash disk
  • mobile hard disk or other optical disk storage
  • disk storage A medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to a method and device for configuring a terminal device. The method comprises: before cell switching, a terminal device determining first configuration information of a first network device, wherein the first network device is a source network device from which the terminal device performs cell switching; during the cell switching, the terminal device receiving second configuration information from a second network device, wherein the second network device is a target network device to which the terminal device performs cell switching; the terminal device determining that the first configuration information comprises a first field, and the second configuration information does not comprise a first field, wherein the first field is a field that needs to be inherited; and the terminal device releasing a configuration, corresponding to the first field, comprised in the first configuration information. In the embodiments of the present application, a terminal device releases a configuration corresponding to a first field, such that fields applied by the terminal device and a second network device are kept consistent, and the terminal device can thus perform normal communication under the second network device.

Description

一种配置终端设备的方法及设备Method and equipment for configuring terminal equipment
相关申请的交叉引用Cross-references to related applications
本申请要求在2020年06月22日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202010570970.0、申请名称为“一种辅助过热信息配置方法、UE及网络设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中;本申请要求在2020年07月28日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202010740597.9、申请名称为“一种配置终端设备的方法及设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China, the application number is 202010570970.0, and the application name is "A method for configuring auxiliary overheating information, UE and network equipment" on June 22, 2020, and its entire contents Incorporated into this application by reference; this application requires the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China, the application number is 202010740597.9, and the application title is "a method and equipment for configuring terminal equipment" on July 28, 2020 Right, the entire contents of which are incorporated in this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种配置终端设备的方法及设备。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a method and device for configuring terminal equipment.
背景技术Background technique
跨基站的小区切换是指,当终端设备从一个基站(源基站)的覆盖区移动到另一个基站(目标基站)的覆盖区,将改变该终端设备原有的通信连接,而转接到另一条通信连接,以使得该终端设备继续保持与基站的通信连接。在终端设备进行小区切换前,源基站会给终端设备下发配置信息,例如称为配置信息1,配置信息1可包括一个或多个信息单元(information element,IE),配置信息1用于终端设备在源基站下通信。在小区切换过程中,源基站会将配置信息1发送给目标基站。在小区切换过程中,目标基站也会给终端设备下发配置信息(通过源基站转发),例如称为配置信息2,配置信息2可包括一个或多个IE,配置信息2用于该终端设备在目标基站下通信,配置信息2可以是根据配置信息1确定的。当终端设备切换到目标基站后,可应用配置信息2。Cell handover across base stations means that when a terminal device moves from the coverage area of one base station (source base station) to the coverage area of another base station (target base station), the original communication connection of the terminal device will be changed and transferred to another base station. A communication connection, so that the terminal device continues to maintain a communication connection with the base station. Before the terminal device performs cell handover, the source base station will issue configuration information to the terminal device, for example, called configuration information 1. The configuration information 1 may include one or more information elements (IE), and the configuration information 1 is for the terminal The device communicates under the source base station. During the cell handover process, the source base station will send configuration information 1 to the target base station. During the cell handover process, the target base station will also send configuration information to the terminal device (forwarded by the source base station), for example, called configuration information 2. The configuration information 2 may include one or more IEs, and the configuration information 2 is used for the terminal device For communication under the target base station, the configuration information 2 may be determined according to the configuration information 1. After the terminal device switches to the target base station, the configuration information 2 can be applied.
各个基站支持的通信版本可能会有所不同,因此源基站和目标基站的通信版本可能是不同的。例如,源基站的通信版本可能会高于目标基站的通信版本。由于高版本的基站支持的功能比低版本的基站支持的功能多,因此高版本的基站能够配置更多的IE,但低版本基站因为不具备新功能,因此也无法识别新功能对应的IE。目标基站由于无法识别这些IE,因此不会将这些IE发送给终端设备。但是有些IE的特性是,如果终端设备上次接收了该IE,但本次未接收该IE,表明终端设备需要继续应用上次接收的该IE所对应的配置。因此对于这类IE,如果终端设备确定源基站向终端设备发送了该IE,而目标基站未向终端设备发送该IE,终端设备就会继续使用来自源基站的该IE对应的配置。而目标基站无法识别该IE,自然无法支持该IE对应的配置,这就可能导致终端设备在目标基站下无法正常通信。The communication version supported by each base station may be different, so the communication version of the source base station and the target base station may be different. For example, the communication version of the source base station may be higher than the communication version of the target base station. Since the base station of the higher version supports more functions than the base station of the lower version, the base station of the higher version can be configured with more IEs, but the base station of the lower version cannot recognize the IE corresponding to the new function because it does not have new functions. Since the target base station cannot recognize these IEs, it will not send these IEs to the terminal device. However, the characteristic of some IEs is that if the terminal device received the IE last time, but did not receive the IE this time, it indicates that the terminal device needs to continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the IE received last time. Therefore, for this type of IE, if the terminal device determines that the source base station has sent the IE to the terminal device, but the target base station has not sent the IE to the terminal device, the terminal device will continue to use the configuration corresponding to the IE from the source base station. However, the target base station cannot recognize the IE, and naturally cannot support the configuration corresponding to the IE, which may cause the terminal device to fail to communicate normally under the target base station.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种配置终端设备的方法及设备,用于使得终端设备与网络设备应用的IE一致,保证终端设备在网络设备下的正常通信。The embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for configuring a terminal device, which are used to make the IE applied by the terminal device and the network device consistent, and to ensure the normal communication of the terminal device under the network device.
第一方面,提供第一种配置终端设备的方法,该方法包括:在小区切换前,确定第一网络设备的第一配置信息,所述第一网络设备为终端设备进行所述小区切换的源网络设备; 在所述小区切换过程中,接收来自第二网络设备的第二配置信息,所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备;确定所述第一配置信息包括第一字段,且所述第二配置信息不包括所述第一字段,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的所述第二配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段;释放所述第一配置信息所包括的所述第一字段对应的配置。In a first aspect, a first method for configuring a terminal device is provided. The method includes: before a cell handover, determining first configuration information of a first network device, where the first network device is a source for the terminal device to perform the cell handover Network equipment; in the cell handover process, receiving second configuration information from a second network equipment, where the second network equipment is the terminal device for the target network equipment for the cell handover; determining the first configuration The information includes a first field, and the second configuration information does not include the first field, where the first field is when the second configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the first field , The terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time; release the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information.
该方法可由第一通信装置执行,第一通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,例如芯片。示例性地,所述第一通信装置为终端设备,或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片,或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中,以第一通信装置是终端设备为例。The method may be executed by a first communication device, and the first communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip. Exemplarily, the first communication device is a terminal device, or a chip set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device. In the following introduction process, it is taken as an example that the first communication device is a terminal device.
例如第一字段是需要继承的字段,即,如果终端设备上次接收了第一字段,但本次未接收第一字段,那么终端设备就需要继续应用上次接收的第一字段对应的配置。那么在本申请实施例中,终端设备如果确定来自第一网络设备的第一配置信息包括第一字段,且来自目标网络设备的第一配置信息不包括第一字段,则终端设备就可以释放第一配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置,即,终端设备不再应用之前接收的第一字段所对应的配置。第二网络设备未向终端设备发送第一字段,很可能是因为第二网络设备无法识别第一字段,因此终端设备释放第一字段所对应的配置,可以使得终端设备和第二网络设备应用的字段保持一致,使得终端设备在第二网络设备下能够正常通信。For example, the first field is a field that needs to be inherited, that is, if the terminal device received the first field last time, but did not receive the first field this time, the terminal device needs to continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field received last time. In this embodiment of the application, if the terminal device determines that the first configuration information from the first network device includes the first field, and the first configuration information from the target network device does not include the first field, the terminal device can release the first field. The configuration corresponding to the first field included in the configuration information, that is, the terminal device no longer applies the previously received configuration corresponding to the first field. The second network device did not send the first field to the terminal device. It is probably because the second network device cannot recognize the first field. Therefore, the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the first field, which can make the terminal device and the second network device apply The fields are kept consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。With reference to the first aspect, in a first optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the first field includes overheating configuration information.
过热配置信息可以配置终端设备向网络设备发送过热相关的信息,或配置终端设备不向网络设备发送过热相关的信息。The overheating configuration information can configure the terminal device to send overheat-related information to the network device, or configure the terminal device not to send overheat-related information to the network device.
结合第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第二种可选的实施方式中,所述过热配置信息包括:With reference to the first optional implementation manner of the first aspect, in a second optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the overheating configuration information includes:
第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示能否向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或,First indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
例如,如果过热配置信息包括第一指示信息,且第一指示信息指示不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,则终端设备不向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。又例如,如果过热配置信息包括第一指示信息和禁止定时器的定时时长,且第一指示信息指示能够向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,则终端设备可以向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,在发送过热相关的辅助信息时或者在发送过热相关的辅助信息后,终端设备开启该禁止定时器,同理,网络设备在接收该过热相关的辅助信息时或者在接收该过热相关的辅助信息后,也开启该禁止定时器。在该禁止定时器的运行时间内,终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,终端设备只能在该禁止定时器超时时或超时后再向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。再例如,如果过热配置信息包括第一指示信息,且第一指示信息指示能够向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,且过热配置信息不包括禁止定时器的定时时长,则终端设备可以在有需求时向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。For example, if the overheating configuration information includes the first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that the auxiliary information related to overheating cannot be sent to the network device, the terminal device does not send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device. For another example, if the overheating configuration information includes the first indication information and the timing duration of the prohibition timer, and the first indication information indicates that the auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device, the terminal device may send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device When sending the auxiliary information related to overheating or after sending the auxiliary information related to overheating, the terminal device starts the prohibition timer. Similarly, the network device receives the auxiliary information related to overheating or when receiving the auxiliary information related to overheating. After that, the prohibit timer is also started. During the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device, and the terminal device can only send the auxiliary information related to the overheating to the network device when the prohibition timer expires or after the timeout. For another example, if the overheating configuration information includes the first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that the auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device, and the overheating configuration information does not include the timing duration of the prohibition timer, the terminal device may be required It sends auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device at any time.
结合第一方面的第二种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第三种可选的实施方式中,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:With reference to the second optional implementation manner of the first aspect, in a third optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
例如,过热相关的辅助信息可包括终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量;或者,过热相关的辅助信息可包括终端设备支持的下行最大辅小区数量;或者,过热相关的辅助信息可包括终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽,以及终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;或者,过热相关的辅助信息可包括终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽,终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数,以及终端设备的类型信息;或者,过热相关的辅助信息可包括终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量,终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量,终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽,终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽,终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数,以及终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数,等等。过热相关的辅助信息所指示的配置(可理解为,过热相关的辅助信息所包括的参数的取值),是终端设备期望的配置,而并不是终端设备的能力所实际能够支持的配置,例如,过热相关的辅助信息所指示的配置,可以低于或等于终端设备的能力所实际支持的配置。可以理解为,如果终端设备应用过热相关的辅助信息所指示的配置,就能改善终端设备的过热情况。For example, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers supported by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum number of auxiliary cells in the downlink supported by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the terminal device's The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that each supported frequency band can support, and the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum aggregate bandwidth supported by the terminal device in each frequency band supported. The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that can be supported by each frequency band, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of each frequency band supported by the terminal device, and the type information of the terminal device; or, auxiliary information related to overheating It can include the maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of uplink auxiliary cells supported by the terminal device, the maximum number of downlink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of downlink auxiliary cells supported by the terminal device, and the maximum uplink aggregation that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band Bandwidth, the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that each serving cell of each supported frequency band of the terminal device can support, and the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers supported by the terminal device in each frequency band supported. The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell on each supported frequency band, and so on. The configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating (which can be understood as the value of the parameter included in the auxiliary information related to overheating) is the configuration expected by the terminal device, rather than the configuration that can be actually supported by the capabilities of the terminal device, for example , The configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating may be lower than or equal to the configuration actually supported by the capabilities of the terminal device. It can be understood that if the terminal device applies the configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating, the overheating of the terminal device can be improved.
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第一方面的第三种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第四种可选的实施方式中,在释放所述第一配置信息所包括的所述第一字段之前,还包括:Combining the first aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the first aspect to any optional implementation manner of the third optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the fourth aspect of the first aspect may be In an optional implementation manner, before releasing the first field included in the first configuration information, the method further includes:
确定所述第二配置信息中不包括第一版本对应的字段,以及不包括高于所述第一版本的任意版本所对应的字段,所述第一版本为所述第一字段对应的通信版本。It is determined that the second configuration information does not include the field corresponding to the first version, and does not include the field corresponding to any version higher than the first version, and the first version is the communication version corresponding to the first field .
对于第一配置信息包括而第二配置信息不包括的一个或多个字段中的每个字段,终端设备可以确定该字段对应的需求码,如果该字段对应的需求码指示该字段为需要继承的字段,例如第一字段就是需要继承的字段,例如第一字段对应的需求码为need M,则对于这样的字段,终端设备可以释放第一配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置,即,终端设备不会继续应用第一配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置。在这种方式中,终端设备无需判断字段所对应的通信版本,只要一个字段包括在第一配置信息中且不包括在第二配置信息中,且该字段为需要继承的字段,终端设备就可以释放第一配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置,从而终端设备不再应用第一配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置。For each of the one or more fields included in the first configuration information but not included in the second configuration information, the terminal device can determine the demand code corresponding to the field, and if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field needs to be inherited For example, the first field is a field that needs to be inherited. For example, the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M. For such a field, the terminal device can release the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information, that is, the terminal The device will not continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information. In this way, the terminal device does not need to determine the communication version corresponding to the field, as long as a field is included in the first configuration information and not included in the second configuration information, and the field is a field that needs to be inherited, the terminal device can The configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information is released, so that the terminal device no longer applies the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information.
或者,在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以确定字段对应的通信版本,再进行相应处理。例如,对于第一配置信息包括而第二配置信息不包括的一个或多个字段中的每个字段,终端设备可以确定该字段对应的需求码,如果该字段对应的需求码指示该字段为需要继承的字段,例如第一字段就是需要继承的字段,例如第一字段对应的需求码为need M,第一 字段对应的通信版本为第一版本,则对于第一字段,则终端设备可以进一步确定,第二配置信息是否包括第一版本所对应的其他字段,或者,确定第二配置信息是否包括高于第一版本的任意版本所对应的其他字段,或者,确定第二配置信息是否包括第一版本所对应的其他字段,以及确定第二配置信息是否包括高于第一版本的任意版本所对应的其他字段。如果第二配置信息包括第一版本所对应的其他字段,或者包括高于第一版本的任意版本所对应的其他字段,或者包括第一版本所对应的其他字段以及包括高于第一版本的任意版本所对应的其他字段,那么终端设备可以确定第二网络设备能够支持第一字段所对应的第一版本,之所以第二配置信息不包括第一字段,可能是第二网络设备认为终端设备需要继续应用第一配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置。因此在这种情况下,终端设备无需释放第一配置信息所包括的第一字段的内容,而是可以继续应用第一配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置。通过对于版本的确定,终端设备可以尽量不释放第二网络设备能够支持的字段包括的内容,使得终端设备与第二网络设备的配置保持一致,保证终端设备在第二网络设备下能够进行正常的数据通信。Alternatively, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also determine the communication version corresponding to the field, and then perform corresponding processing. For example, for each field in one or more fields that are included in the first configuration information but not included in the second configuration information, the terminal device may determine the demand code corresponding to the field, and if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field is required Inherited fields, for example, the first field is the field that needs to be inherited. For example, the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M, and the communication version corresponding to the first field is the first version. For the first field, the terminal device can further determine , Whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to the first version, or determine whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to any version higher than the first version, or determine whether the second configuration information includes the first version Other fields corresponding to the version, and determining whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to any version higher than the first version. If the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to the first version, or includes other fields corresponding to any version higher than the first version, or includes other fields corresponding to the first version and includes any other fields higher than the first version Version corresponding to other fields, then the terminal device can determine that the second network device can support the first version corresponding to the first field. The reason why the second configuration information does not include the first field may be that the second network device thinks that the terminal device needs Continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information. Therefore, in this case, the terminal device does not need to release the content of the first field included in the first configuration information, but can continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information. By determining the version, the terminal device can try not to release the content included in the fields that the second network device can support, so that the configuration of the terminal device and the second network device are consistent, and ensure that the terminal device can perform normally under the second network device. data communication.
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第一方面的第四种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第一方面的第五种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:Combining the first aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the first aspect to any optional implementation manner of the fourth optional implementation manner of the first aspect, the fifth aspect of the first aspect may be In an optional embodiment, the method further includes:
将所述终端设备的能力由第一能力调整为第二能力,其中,所述第一能力低于所述第二能力,所述第一能力是所述第一网络设备为适配所述第一字段的内容而配置的。The capability of the terminal device is adjusted from a first capability to a second capability, where the first capability is lower than the second capability, and the first capability is that the first network device is adapted to the second capability. The content of a field is configured.
例如,若第一网络设备接收了来自终端设备的过热相关的辅助信息,第一网络设备可以决策是否要降低该终端设备的空口配置,从而缓解该终端设备的过热问题。如果第一网络设备决定降低终端设备的空口配置,第一网络设备可以根据接收的过热相关的辅助信息确定空口配置信息,并将空口配置信息包括在RRC重配置消息中发送给终端设备。终端设备接收该空口配置信息后,可以应用该空口配置信息,以降低终端设备的空口配置。例如,在降低空口配置之前,终端设备的能力为第二能力,在降低空口配置之后,终端设备的能力为第一能力,第一能力低于第二能力。而终端设备要切换到第二网络设备,第二网络设备可能并不支持第一字段所对应的通信版本,即,目标网络设备无法识别第一字段,那么第二网络设备自然也无法获知终端设备根据第一字段调整了能力。因此,终端设备可以将终端设备的能力再调整回第二能力,使得第二网络设备能够按照第二能力调度终端设备,减小因为第二网络设备所理解的终端设备的能力与终端设备实际应用的能力不一致而导致的调度出错的概率。For example, if the first network device receives the auxiliary information related to overheating from the terminal device, the first network device can decide whether to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, so as to alleviate the overheating problem of the terminal device. If the first network device decides to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, the first network device may determine the air interface configuration information according to the received auxiliary information related to overheating, and include the air interface configuration information in the RRC reconfiguration message and send it to the terminal device. After receiving the air interface configuration information, the terminal device can apply the air interface configuration information to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device. For example, before the air interface configuration is reduced, the capability of the terminal device is the second capability, and after the air interface configuration is reduced, the capability of the terminal device is the first capability, and the first capability is lower than the second capability. If the terminal device needs to switch to the second network device, the second network device may not support the communication version corresponding to the first field, that is, the target network device cannot recognize the first field, so the second network device naturally cannot learn about the terminal device. The ability is adjusted according to the first field. Therefore, the terminal device can adjust the capability of the terminal device back to the second capability, so that the second network device can schedule the terminal device according to the second capability, reducing the ability of the terminal device and the actual application of the terminal device as understood by the second network device. The probability of scheduling errors caused by inconsistent capabilities.
第二方面,提供第二种配置终端设备的方法,该方法包括:确定第二版本低于第一版本,所述第一版本为第一网络设备的通信版本,所述第二版本为第二网络设备对应的通信版本,所述第一网络设备为终端设备进行小区切换的源网络设备,所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备;向所述终端设备发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段;向所述终端设备发送切换命令,所述切换命令用于指示从所述第一网络设备切换到所述第二网络设备。In a second aspect, a second method for configuring a terminal device is provided, the method comprising: determining that the second version is lower than the first version, the first version is the communication version of the first network device, and the second version is the second version. The communication version corresponding to the network device, the first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover; to the terminal device Send first information, the first information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field, where the first field is when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the first field, the terminal The device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time; send a switching command to the terminal device, where the switching command is used to instruct to switch from the first network device to the second network device.
该方法可由第二通信装置执行,第二通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,例如芯片。示例性地,所述第二通信装置为网络设备, 或者为设置在网络设备中的用于实现网络设备的功能的芯片,或者为用于实现网络设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中,以第二通信装置是网络设备为例,例如第一网络设备。示例性地,所述第一网络设备为接入网设备。The method may be executed by a second communication device, and the second communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip. Exemplarily, the second communication device is a network device, or a chip set in the network device for realizing the function of the network device, or other component used for realizing the function of the network device. In the following introduction process, it is assumed that the second communication device is a network device, for example, the first network device. Exemplarily, the first network device is an access network device.
在本申请实施例中,第一网络设备如果确定第二网络设备的通信版本低于第一网络设备的通信版本,则可以指示终端设备释放全部或部分需要继承的字段对应的配置,这样,终端设备不再应用之前接收的这些字段所对应的配置。这样可以使得终端设备和目标网络设备应用的字段保持一致,使得终端设备在目标网络设备下能够正常通信。In the embodiment of the present application, if the first network device determines that the communication version of the second network device is lower than the communication version of the first network device, it can instruct the terminal device to release all or part of the configuration corresponding to the fields that need to be inherited. In this way, the terminal The device no longer applies the configuration corresponding to these fields previously received. In this way, the application fields of the terminal device and the target network device can be kept consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the target network device.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一字段对应于所述第一版本,或,对应于所述第一版本与所述第二版本之间的其他版本。With reference to the second aspect, in a first optional implementation manner of the second aspect, the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to the difference between the first version and the second version Other versions of.
因为第二网络设备的通信版本为第二版本,因此无论是对应于第二版本的字段,或对应于低于第二版本的其他版本所对应的字段,都是第二网络设备能够支持的,第一网络设备如果将这些字段包括在配置信息中发送给第二网络设备,第二网络设备是能够识别的,也能够根据这些字段做进一步的配置。因此在这种方式下,第一网络设备需要确定第二网络设备的具体版本,也需要确定字段对应的版本,第一网络设备只是指示终端设备释放对应于第一版本的字段,以及释放对应于第一版本和第二版本之间的其他版本的字段,但无需释放对应于第二版本的字段,以及无需释放对应于低于第二版本的其他版本所对应的字段。这样也能使得第二网络设备和终端设备对于配置信息的理解保持一致,且终端设备需要释放的字段较少,能够减轻终端设备的工作量。而且对于这些未释放的、第二网络设备能够识别的字段,第二网络设备也能进行进一步的配置,有助于减少第二网络设备的工作量。Because the communication version of the second network device is the second version, no matter the fields corresponding to the second version or the fields corresponding to other versions lower than the second version, the second network device can support. If the first network device includes these fields in the configuration information and sends it to the second network device, the second network device can be identified and can also make further configurations based on these fields. Therefore, in this way, the first network device needs to determine the specific version of the second network device, and also the version corresponding to the field. The first network device just instructs the terminal device to release the field corresponding to the first version, and release the field corresponding to the first version. Fields of other versions between the first version and the second version, but there is no need to release the fields corresponding to the second version, and there is no need to release the fields corresponding to other versions lower than the second version. This can also make the second network device and the terminal device have consistent understanding of the configuration information, and the terminal device needs to release fewer fields, which can reduce the workload of the terminal device. Moreover, for these unreleased fields that can be recognized by the second network device, the second network device can also perform further configuration, which helps reduce the workload of the second network device.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第二种可选的实施方式中,所述第一信息用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置,包括:With reference to the second aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the second aspect, in a second optional implementation manner of the second aspect, the first information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field, including :
所述第一信息包括所述第一字段,且所述第一字段的内容用于指示释放所述第一字段对应的配置;或者,The first information includes the first field, and the content of the first field is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field; or,
所述第一信息为第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示释放一个或多个字段对应的配置,所述一个或多个字段包括所述第一字段,所述一个或多个字段中的每个字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述字段的内容的字段。The first information is first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to one or more fields, the one or more fields include the first field, and the one or more fields Each field in the field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the field received last time when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the field.
例如,第一信息可以是配置信息。第一内容可以指示释放相应的字段。例如,第一网络设备之前配置给终端设备的配置信息包括第一字段,那么第一信息也包括第一字段,且第一字段的内容为第一内容,第一内容用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置,或者说用于指示释放第一字段的内容。那么终端设备接收第一信息后,根据第一字段所包括的第一内容,就会释放终端设备侧所存储的之前来自第一网络设备的配置信息包括的第一字段的内容,从而不再继续应用该配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置。在这种实施方式下,相当于第一网络设备重新向终端设备发送新的配置信息,以指示释放原配置信息所包括的全部或部分需要继承的字段。这种指示方式对于终端设备来说较为明确,终端设备根据第一信息所包括的字段就能够确定需要释放哪些字段。For example, the first information may be configuration information. The first content may indicate the release of the corresponding field. For example, if the configuration information previously configured for the terminal device by the first network device includes the first field, the first information also includes the first field, and the content of the first field is the first content, and the first content is used to indicate the release of the first field The corresponding configuration, in other words, is used to indicate the release of the content of the first field. Then after the terminal device receives the first information, according to the first content included in the first field, the terminal device side will release the content of the first field included in the configuration information from the first network device previously stored on the terminal device side, so as not to continue. The configuration corresponding to the first field included in the configuration information is applied. In this implementation manner, it is equivalent to the first network device resending new configuration information to the terminal device to instruct to release all or part of the fields that need to be inherited included in the original configuration information. This indication method is relatively clear for the terminal device, and the terminal device can determine which fields need to be released according to the fields included in the first information.
或者,第一信息可以是指示信息,例如称为第一指示信息,第一指示信息可以占用一个或多个比特。第一指示信息可以指示释放一个或多个字段对应的配置,第一字段例如是这一个或多个字段中的一个。这一个或多个字段都是需要继承的字段,这一个或多个字段 就是第一网络设备之前配置给终端设备的配置信息所包括的全部或部分需要继承的字段,也就是说,第一指示信息用于指示释放该配置信息所包括的全部或部分需要继承的字段。终端设备接收第一指示信息后,就可以释放终端设备侧所存储的之前来自第一网络设备的配置信息包括的全部或部分需要继承的字段的内容,从而不再继续应用该配置信息所包括的这些字段对应的配置。例如终端设备释放的字段中包括第一字段。在这种实施方式下,第一网络设备无需向终端设备重新发送新的配置信息,而只需向终端设备发送第一指示信息,就能够指示释放相应的字段。相对于配置信息来说,第一指示信息的信息量较小,有助于节省传输开销。Alternatively, the first information may be indication information, for example called first indication information, and the first indication information may occupy one or more bits. The first indication information may indicate to release the configuration corresponding to one or more fields, and the first field is, for example, one of the one or more fields. These one or more fields are all fields that need to be inherited. These one or more fields are all or part of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information previously configured for the terminal device by the first network device, that is, the first indication The information is used to indicate the release of all or part of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information. After the terminal device receives the first indication information, it can release all or part of the content of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information from the first network device stored on the terminal device side, so that the configuration information included in the configuration information is no longer applied. The configuration corresponding to these fields. For example, the field released by the terminal device includes the first field. In this implementation manner, the first network device does not need to re-send new configuration information to the terminal device, but only needs to send the first instruction information to the terminal device to instruct the release of the corresponding field. Compared with the configuration information, the information amount of the first indication information is small, which helps to save transmission overhead.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式或第二方面的第二种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第三种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In combination with the second aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the second aspect or the second optional implementation manner of the second aspect, in the third optional implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further include:
向所述第二网络设备发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备配置的字段,且所述第一配置信息不包括所述第一字段。Sending first configuration information to the second network device, where the first configuration information includes a field configured by the first network device for the terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include the first field.
例如,第一网络设备可根据第一网络设备之前配置给终端设备的配置信息得到第一配置信息。例如,第一网络设备从之前配置给终端设备的配置信息中删除需要继承的字段中的全部或部分字段,由此所得到的配置信息,就可以是第一配置信息。第一网络设备从之前配置给终端设备的配置信息中所删除的这些字段,也就是第一网络设备指示终端设备需要释放的字段。第二网络设备得到第一配置信息后,可以根据第一配置信息来配置终端设备。由于第一配置信息并不包括第二网络设备无法识别的需要继承的字段,因此第二网络设备能够正常配置终端设备。For example, the first network device may obtain the first configuration information according to the configuration information previously configured to the terminal device by the first network device. For example, the first network device deletes all or part of the fields that need to be inherited from the configuration information previously configured for the terminal device, and the configuration information obtained thereby may be the first configuration information. These fields deleted by the first network device from the configuration information previously configured for the terminal device are the fields that the first network device instructs the terminal device to release. After obtaining the first configuration information, the second network device can configure the terminal device according to the first configuration information. Since the first configuration information does not include fields that need to be inherited that the second network device cannot recognize, the second network device can configure the terminal device normally.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式或第二方面的第二种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第三种可选的实施方式中,In combination with the second aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the second aspect or the second optional implementation manner of the second aspect, in the third optional implementation manner of the second aspect,
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第二方面的第三种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第四种可选的实施方式中,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。Combining the second aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the second aspect to any optional implementation manner of the third optional implementation manner of the second aspect, the fourth aspect of the second aspect may be In an optional implementation manner, the first field includes overheating configuration information.
结合第二方面的第四种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第五种可选的实施方式中,所述过热配置信息包括:With reference to the fourth optional implementation manner of the second aspect, in a fifth optional implementation manner of the second aspect, the overheating configuration information includes:
第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示能否向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或,Second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
结合第二方面的第五种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第六种可选的实施方式中,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:With reference to the fifth optional implementation manner of the second aspect, in the sixth optional implementation manner of the second aspect, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第二方面的第六种可选的实施 方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第七种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:Combining the second aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the second aspect to the sixth optional implementation manner of the second aspect, the seventh optional implementation manner of the second aspect In an optional embodiment, the method further includes:
接收来自所述第二网络设备的版本指示信息,所述版本指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备的通信版本为所述第二版本。Receiving version indication information from the second network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate that the communication version of the second network device is the second version.
第二网络设备可向第一网络设备发送版本指示信息,从而第一网络设备能够明确第二网络设备的通信版本,以进行后续的相关操作。The second network device may send version indication information to the first network device, so that the first network device can determine the communication version of the second network device for subsequent related operations.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第二方面的第七种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第二方面的第八种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:Combining the second aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the second aspect to any optional implementation manner of the seventh optional implementation manner of the second aspect, the eighth aspect of the second aspect may be In an optional embodiment, the method further includes:
接收来自所述第二网络设备的配置指示信息,所述配置指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置所述终端设备,所述全配置方式为将待配置给所述终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。Receiving configuration indication information from the second network device, where the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use a full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, and the full configuration mode is to configure the terminal device to be configured to the The way in which all fields of the terminal device are reconfigured.
本申请实施例中,第二网络设备所应用的配置方式是继承制的配置方式,或者说是迭代式的配置方式,即,需要基于前一次的配置来进行后一次的配置,例如基于第一网络设备的第一配置信息来确定第二配置信息,也就是说,第二配置信息不是采用全配置的方式配置的。而在实际应用中,第二网络设备还可以采用全配置的方式,全配置方式为将待配置给终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。关于全配置的方式,可参考图5所示的实施例的相关介绍。本申请实施例并不限制第二网络设备所采用的配置方式,但是,如果第二网络设备采用了全配置的方式,则对于第一网络设备来说,就无需指示终端设备释放需要继承的字段。因此,作为一种可选的实施方式,第二网络设备可以向第一网络设备发送配置指示信息,第一网络设备可接收来自第二网络设备的配置指示信息。该配置指示信息可指示第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置终端设备,从而第一网络设备能够进行后续的相关操作。In the embodiment of the present application, the configuration mode applied by the second network device is the inheritance configuration mode, or iterative configuration mode, that is, the next configuration needs to be performed based on the previous configuration, for example, based on the first configuration. The first configuration information of the network device determines the second configuration information, that is, the second configuration information is not configured in a full configuration manner. In practical applications, the second network device may also adopt a full configuration mode, which is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured. Regarding the full configuration mode, reference may be made to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5. The embodiment of this application does not limit the configuration method adopted by the second network device, but if the second network device adopts the full configuration method, for the first network device, there is no need to instruct the terminal device to release the fields that need to be inherited . Therefore, as an optional implementation manner, the second network device may send configuration instruction information to the first network device, and the first network device may receive configuration instruction information from the second network device. The configuration instruction information may indicate that the second network device has not configured the terminal device in a full configuration mode, so that the first network device can perform subsequent related operations.
关于第二方面的部分实施方式所带来的技术效果,可参考对于第一方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects brought about by some implementations of the second aspect, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the corresponding implementations of the first aspect.
第三方面,提供第三种配置终端设备的方法,该方法包括:向第一网络设备发送版本指示信息,所述版本指示信息用于指示第二版本,所述第二版本为第二网络设备的通信版本;接收来自所述第一网络设备的第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一网络设备为终端设备配置的字段,且所述第一配置信息不包括第一字段,所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备进行小区切换的源网络设备,所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段。In a third aspect, a third method for configuring a terminal device is provided. The method includes: sending version indication information to a first network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate a second version, and the second version is the second network device The communication version of the; receiving first configuration information from the first network device, where the first configuration information includes a field configured by the first network device for a terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include the first field , The first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover, wherein the first field is the current When the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the first field, the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time.
该方法可由第三通信装置执行,第三通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,例如芯片。示例性地,所述第三通信装置为网络设备,或者为设置在网络设备中的用于实现网络设备的功能的芯片,或者为用于实现网络设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中,以第三通信装置是网络设备为例,例如第二网络设备。示例性地,所述第二网络设备为接入网设备。The method may be executed by a third communication device, and the third communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip. Exemplarily, the third communication device is a network device, or a chip set in the network device for realizing the function of the network device, or other component used for realizing the function of the network device. In the following introduction process, it is assumed that the third communication device is a network device, such as a second network device. Exemplarily, the second network device is an access network device.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的第一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一字段对应于第一版本,或,对应于第一版本与所述第二版本之间的其他版本,所述第一版本为所述第一网络设备的通信版本,其中,所述第二版本低于所述第一版本。With reference to the third aspect, in a first optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to other versions between the first version and the second version, The first version is a communication version of the first network device, wherein the second version is lower than the first version.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可选的实施方式,在第三方面的第二种可选的实施方式中,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。With reference to the third aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the third aspect, in a second optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the first field includes overheating configuration information.
结合第三方面的第二种可选的实施方式,在第三方面的第三种可选的实施方式中,所述过热配置信息包括:With reference to the second optional implementation manner of the third aspect, in a third optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the overheating configuration information includes:
第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示是否能够向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或,Second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
结合第三方面的第三种可选的实施方式,在第三方面的第四种可选的实施方式中,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:With reference to the third optional implementation manner of the third aspect, in the fourth optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第三方面的第四种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第三方面的第五种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:Combining the third aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the third aspect to any optional implementation manner of the fourth optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the fifth aspect of the third aspect may be In an optional embodiment, the method further includes:
向所述第一网络设备发送配置指示信息,所述配置指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置所述终端设备,所述全配置方式为将待配置给所述终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。Send configuration instruction information to the first network device, where the configuration instruction information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use a full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, and the full configuration mode is to configure the terminal device to be configured The way in which all fields of the device are reconfigured.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第三方面的第五种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第三方面的第六种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:Combining the third aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the third aspect to any optional implementation manner of the fifth optional implementation manner of the third aspect, the sixth aspect of the third aspect can be In an optional embodiment, the method further includes:
向所述终端设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备配置的字段,且所述第二配置信息是根据所述第一配置信息得到的。Send second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information includes fields configured by the second network device for the terminal device, and the second configuration information is obtained according to the first configuration information .
关于第三方面或第三方面的各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果,可参考对于第二方面或第二方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects brought by the third aspect or various optional implementation manners of the third aspect, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the second aspect or the corresponding implementation manners of the second aspect.
第四方面,提供一种通信装置,例如该通信装置为如前所述的第一通信装置。所述第一通信装置用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任一可选的实施方式中的方法。具体地,所述第一通信装置可以包括用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任一可选的实施方式中的方法的模块,例如包括处理模块,可选的,还可以包括收发模块。示例性地,收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地,所述第一通信装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地,所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第一通信装置是终端设备为例。例如,所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现,所述处理模块也可以通过处理器(或者,处理电路)实现。或者,发送模块可以通过发送器实现,接收模块可以通过接收器实现,发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个 功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。如果第一通信装置为通信设备,收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第一通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么收发器(或,发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第四方面的介绍过程中,继续以所述第一通信装置是终端设备,以及,以所述处理模块、所述发送模块和所述接收模块为例进行介绍。其中,In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the first communication device as described above. The first communication device is configured to execute the foregoing first aspect or the method in any optional implementation of the first aspect. Specifically, the first communication device may include a module for executing the method in the first aspect or any optional implementation of the first aspect, for example, a processing module, and optionally, a transceiver module. Exemplarily, the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module. The sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may also be the same functional module, but can implement different functions. Exemplarily, the first communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device. Exemplarily, the communication device is a terminal device. In the following, it is taken as an example that the first communication device is a terminal device. For example, the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor (or a processing circuit). Alternatively, the sending module can be implemented by a transmitter, and the receiving module can be implemented by a receiver. The transmitter and the receiver can be different functional modules, or can be the same functional module, but can implement different functions. If the first communication device is a communication device, the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device. Or, if the first communication device is a chip set in a communication device, the transceiver (or transmitter and receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components. In the introduction process of the fourth aspect, the first communication device is continued to be a terminal device, and the processing module, the sending module, and the receiving module are used as examples for the introduction. in,
所述处理模块,用于在小区切换前,确定第一网络设备的第一配置信息,所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的源网络设备;The processing module is configured to determine first configuration information of a first network device before the cell handover, where the first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
所述接收模块,用于在所述小区切换过程中,接收来自第二网络设备的第二配置信息,所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备;The receiving module is configured to receive second configuration information from a second network device during the cell handover process, where the second network device is a target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
所述处理模块,还用于确定所述第一配置信息包括第一字段,且所述第二配置信息不包括所述第一字段,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的所述第二配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段;The processing module is further configured to determine that the first configuration information includes a first field, and the second configuration information does not include the first field, where the first field is when the terminal device receives When the second configuration information does not include the first field, the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time;
所述处理模块,还用于释放所述第一配置信息所包括的所述第一字段对应的配置。The processing module is further configured to release the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的第一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。With reference to the fourth aspect, in a first optional implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the first field includes overheating configuration information.
结合第四方面的第一种可选的实施方式,在第四方面的第二种可选的实施方式中,所述过热配置信息包括:With reference to the first optional implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a second optional implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the overheating configuration information includes:
第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示能否向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或,First indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
结合第四方面的第二种可选的实施方式,在第四方面的第三种可选的实施方式中,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:With reference to the second optional implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a third optional implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第四方面的第三种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第四方面的第四种可选的实施方式中,所述处理模块,还用于在释放所述第一配置信息所包括的所述第一字段之前,确定所述第二配置信息中不包括第一版本对应的字段,以及不包括高于所述第一版本的任意版本所对应的字段,所述第一版本为所述第一字段对应的通信版本。Combining the fourth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the fourth aspect to any optional implementation manner of the third optional implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the fourth aspect of the fourth aspect may be In an optional implementation manner, the processing module is further configured to determine that the second configuration information does not include the field corresponding to the first version before releasing the first field included in the first configuration information, and The field corresponding to any version higher than the first version is not included, and the first version is the communication version corresponding to the first field.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第四方面的第四种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第四方面的第五种可选的实施方式中,所述处理模块,还用于将所述终端设备的能力由第一能力调整为第二能力,其中,所述第一能力低于所述第二能力,所述第一能力是所述第一网络设备为适配所述第一字段的内容而配置的。Combining the fourth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the fourth aspect to any optional implementation manner of the fourth optional implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect of the fourth aspect may be In an optional implementation manner, the processing module is further configured to adjust the capability of the terminal device from a first capability to a second capability, where the first capability is lower than the second capability, and the first capability is lower than the second capability. The capability is configured by the first network device to adapt the content of the first field.
关于第四方面或第四方面的各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果,可参考对于第一方面或第一方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects brought about by the fourth aspect or various optional implementation manners of the fourth aspect, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the first aspect or the corresponding implementation manners of the first aspect.
第五方面,提供一种通信装置,例如该通信装置为如前所述的第二通信装置。所述第二通信装置用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任一可选的实施方式中的方法。具体地,所述第二通信装置可以包括用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任一可选的实施方式中的方法的模块,例如包括处理模块,可选的,还可以包括收发模块。示例性地,收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地,所述第二通信装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地,所述通信设备为网络设备,例如第一网络设备。示例性地,所述第一网络设备为接入网设备,例如基站。下面以第二通信装置是第一网络设备为例。例如,所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现,所述处理模块也可以通过处理器(或者,处理电路)实现。或者,发送模块可以通过发送器实现,接收模块可以通过接收器实现,发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。如果第二通信装置为通信设备,收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第二通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么收发器(或,发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第五方面的介绍过程中,继续以所述第二通信装置是第一网络设备,以及,以所述处理模块、所述发送模块和所述接收模块为例进行介绍。其中,In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the second communication device as described above. The second communication device is configured to execute the foregoing second aspect or the method in any optional implementation manner of the second aspect. Specifically, the second communication device may include a module for executing the method in the second aspect or any optional implementation of the second aspect, for example, a processing module, and optionally, a transceiver module. Exemplarily, the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module. The sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may also be the same functional module, but can implement different functions. Exemplarily, the second communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device. Exemplarily, the communication device is a network device, such as a first network device. Exemplarily, the first network device is an access network device, such as a base station. In the following, it is taken as an example that the second communication device is the first network device. For example, the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor (or a processing circuit). Alternatively, the sending module may be realized by a transmitter, and the receiving module may be realized by a receiver. The transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions. If the second communication device is a communication device, the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device. Or, if the second communication device is a chip set in a communication device, the transceiver (or, transmitter and receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components. In the introduction of the fifth aspect, the second communication device is the first network device, and the processing module, the sending module, and the receiving module are used as examples for the introduction. in,
所述处理模块,用于确定第二版本低于第一版本,所述第一版本为第一网络设备的通信版本,所述第二版本为第二网络设备对应的通信版本,所述第一网络设备为终端设备进行小区切换的源网络设备,所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备;The processing module is configured to determine that the second version is lower than the first version, the first version is the communication version of the first network device, the second version is the communication version corresponding to the second network device, and the first version is the communication version corresponding to the second network device. The network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
所述发送模块,用于向所述终端设备发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段;The sending module is configured to send first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used to instruct to release the configuration corresponding to the first field, where the first field is the configuration information received by the terminal device When the first field is not included, the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time;
所述发送模块,还用于向所述终端设备发送切换命令,所述切换命令用于指示从所述第一网络设备切换到所述第二网络设备。The sending module is further configured to send a switching command to the terminal device, where the switching command is used to instruct to switch from the first network device to the second network device.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的第一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一字段对应于所述第一版本,或,对应于所述第一版本与所述第二版本之间的其他版本。With reference to the fifth aspect, in a first optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to the difference between the first version and the second version Other versions of.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可选的实施方式,在第五方面的第二种可选的实施方式中,所述第一信息用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置,包括:With reference to the fifth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a second optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the first information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field, including :
所述第一信息包括所述第一字段,且所述第一字段的内容用于指示释放所述第一字段对应的配置;或者,The first information includes the first field, and the content of the first field is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field; or,
所述第一信息为第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示释放一个或多个字段对应的配置,所述一个或多个字段包括所述第一字段,所述一个或多个字段中的每个字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述字段的内容的字段。The first information is first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to one or more fields, the one or more fields include the first field, and the one or more fields Each field in the field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the field received last time when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the field.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可选的实施方式或第五方面的第二种可选的实施方式,在第五方面的第三种可选的实施方式中,所述发送模块,还用于向所述第二网络设 备发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备配置的字段,且所述第一配置信息不包括所述第一字段。In combination with the fifth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect or the second optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a third optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the sending module , Is also used to send first configuration information to the second network device, where the first configuration information includes the fields configured by the first network device for the terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include the The first field.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第五方面的第三种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第五方面的第四种可选的实施方式中,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。Combining the fifth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect to the third optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the fourth optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect In an optional implementation manner, the first field includes overheating configuration information.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第五方面的第四种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第五方面的第五种可选的实施方式中,所述过热配置信息包括:Combining the fifth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect to any optional implementation manner of the fourth optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the fifth aspect of the fifth aspect may be In an optional implementation manner, the overheating configuration information includes:
第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示能否向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或,Second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
结合第五方面的第五种可选的实施方式,在第五方面的第六种可选的实施方式中,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:With reference to the fifth optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in the sixth optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第五方面的第六种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第五方面的第七种可选的实施方式中,所述接收模块,用于接收来自所述第二网络设备的版本指示信息,所述版本指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备的通信版本为所述第二版本。Combining the fifth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect to any optional implementation manner of the sixth optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the seventh optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect In an optional implementation manner, the receiving module is configured to receive version indication information from the second network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate that the communication version of the second network device is the second version.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第五方面的第七种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第五方面的第八种可选的实施方式中,所述接收模块,用于接收来自所述第二网络设备的配置指示信息,所述配置指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置所述终端设备,所述全配置方式为将待配置给所述终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。Combining the fifth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect to any optional implementation manner of the seventh optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the eighth optional implementation manner of the fifth aspect In an optional implementation manner, the receiving module is configured to receive configuration indication information from the second network device, and the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device , The full configuration mode is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
关于第五方面或第五方面的各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果,可参考对于第二方面或第二方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects brought about by the fifth aspect or various optional implementation manners of the fifth aspect, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the second aspect or the corresponding implementation manners of the second aspect.
第六方面,提供一种通信装置,例如该通信装置为如前所述的第三通信装置。所述第三通信装置用于执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任一可选的实施方式中的方法。具体地,所述第三通信装置可以包括用于执行第三方面或第三方面的任一可选的实施方式中的方法的模块,例如包括处理模块,可选的,还可以包括收发模块。示例性地,收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地,所述第三通信装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地,所述通信设备为网络设备,例如第二网络设备。示例性地,所述第二网络设备为接入网设备,例如基站。下面以第三通信装置 是第二网络设备为例。例如,所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现,所述处理模块也可以通过处理器(或者,处理电路)实现。或者,发送模块可以通过发送器实现,接收模块可以通过接收器实现,发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。如果第三通信装置为通信设备,收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第三通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么收发器(或,发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第六方面的介绍过程中,继续以所述第三通信装置是第二网络设备,以及,以所述处理模块、所述发送模块和所述接收模块为例进行介绍。其中,In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the third communication device as described above. The third communication device is configured to execute the foregoing third aspect or the method in any optional implementation manner of the third aspect. Specifically, the third communication device may include a module for executing the method in the third aspect or any optional implementation of the third aspect, for example, a processing module, and optionally, a transceiver module. Exemplarily, the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module. The sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may also be the same functional module, but can implement different functions. Exemplarily, the third communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device. Exemplarily, the communication device is a network device, such as a second network device. Exemplarily, the second network device is an access network device, such as a base station. In the following, it is taken as an example that the third communication device is the second network device. For example, the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor (or a processing circuit). Alternatively, the sending module may be realized by a transmitter, and the receiving module may be realized by a receiver. The transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions. If the third communication device is a communication device, the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device. Or, if the third communication device is a chip set in the communication device, the transceiver (or, the transmitter and the receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components. In the introduction of the sixth aspect, the third communication device is continued to be the second network device, and the processing module, the sending module, and the receiving module are used as examples for the introduction. in,
所述发送模块,用于向第一网络设备发送版本指示信息,所述版本指示信息用于指示第二版本,所述第二版本为第二网络设备的通信版本;The sending module is configured to send version indication information to a first network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate a second version, and the second version is a communication version of the second network device;
所述接收模块,用于接收来自所述第一网络设备的第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一网络设备为终端设备配置的字段,且所述第一配置信息不包括第一字段,所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备进行小区切换的源网络设备,所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段。The receiving module is configured to receive first configuration information from the first network device, where the first configuration information includes a field configured by the first network device for a terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include In the first field, the first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover, wherein the first The field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the first field received last time when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the first field.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的第一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一字段对应于第一版本,或,对应于第一版本与所述第二版本之间的其他版本,所述第一版本为所述第一网络设备的通信版本,其中,所述第二版本低于所述第一版本。With reference to the sixth aspect, in a first optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to other versions between the first version and the second version, The first version is a communication version of the first network device, wherein the second version is lower than the first version.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可选的实施方式,在第六方面的第二种可选的实施方式中,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。With reference to the sixth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a second optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the first field includes overheating configuration information.
结合第六方面的第二种可选的实施方式,在第六方面的第三种可选的实施方式中,所述过热配置信息包括:With reference to the second optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a third optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the overheating configuration information includes:
第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示是否能够向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或Second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or
禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
结合第六方面的第三种可选的实施方式,在第六方面的第四种可选的实施方式中,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:With reference to the third optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in the fourth optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第六方面的第四种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第六方面的第五种可选的实施方式中,所述发送模块,还用于向所述第一网络设备发送配置指示信息,所述配置指示信息用于指示所述第二网络 设备未使用全配置方式配置所述终端设备,所述全配置方式为将待配置给所述终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。Combining the sixth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect to any optional implementation manner of the fourth optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the fifth aspect of the sixth aspect may be In an optional implementation manner, the sending module is further configured to send configuration indication information to the first network device, and the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device , The full configuration mode is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第六方面的第五种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式,在第六方面的第六种可选的实施方式中,所述发送模块,还用于向所述终端设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备配置的字段,且所述第二配置信息是根据所述第一配置信息得到的。Combining the sixth aspect or the first optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect to any optional implementation manner of the fifth optional implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the sixth aspect of the sixth aspect may be In an optional implementation manner, the sending module is further configured to send second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information includes a field configured by the second network device for the terminal device, and the The second configuration information is obtained according to the first configuration information.
关于第六方面或第六方面的各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果,可参考对于第三方面或第三方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects brought by the sixth aspect or various optional implementation manners of the sixth aspect, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the third aspect or the corresponding implementation manners of the third aspect.
第七方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置例如为如前所述的第一通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器(或者,处理电路)和通信接口(或者,接口电路),通信接口可用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。可选的,还可以包括存储器,用于存储计算机指令。处理器和存储器相互耦合,用于实现上述第一方面或第一方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者,第一通信装置也可以不包括存储器,存储器可以位于第一通信装置外部。处理器、存储器和通信接口相互耦合,用于实现上述第一方面或第一方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如,当处理器执行所述存储器存储的计算机指令时,使第一通信装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地,所述第一通信装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的,所述通信设备为终端设备。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device is, for example, the first communication device as described above. The communication device includes a processor (or processing circuit) and a communication interface (or interface circuit), and the communication interface can be used to communicate with other devices or equipment. Optionally, it may also include a memory for storing computer instructions. The processor and the memory are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing first aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the first aspect. Alternatively, the first communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the first communication device. The processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing first aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the first aspect. For example, when the processor executes the computer instructions stored in the memory, the first communication device is caused to execute the foregoing first aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect. Exemplarily, the first communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device. Exemplarily, the communication device is a terminal device.
其中,如果第一通信装置为通信设备,通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者,发送器和接收器)实现,例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第一通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口,例如输入/输出管脚等,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。Wherein, if the first communication device is a communication device, the communication interface is implemented, for example, by a transceiver (or, a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, the transceiver is implemented by an antenna, a feeder and a receiver in the communication device. Codec and other implementations. Or, if the first communication device is a chip set in a communication device, the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
第八方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置例如为如前所述的第二通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器(或者,处理电路)和通信接口(或者,接口电路),通信接口可用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。可选的,还可以包括存储器,用于存储计算机指令。处理器和存储器相互耦合,用于实现上述第二方面或第二方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者,第二通信装置也可以不包括存储器,存储器可以位于第二通信装置外部。处理器、存储器和通信接口相互耦合,用于实现上述第二方面或第二方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如,当处理器执行所述存储器存储的计算机指令时,使第二通信装置执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地,所述第二通信装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的,所述通信设备为网络设备,例如第一网络设备。示例性地,所述第一网络设备为接入网设备,例如基站。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device is, for example, the second communication device as described above. The communication device includes a processor (or processing circuit) and a communication interface (or interface circuit), and the communication interface can be used to communicate with other devices or equipment. Optionally, it may also include a memory for storing computer instructions. The processor and the memory are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing second aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the second aspect. Alternatively, the second communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the second communication device. The processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing second aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the second aspect. For example, when the processor executes the computer instructions stored in the memory, the second communication device is caused to execute the foregoing second aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect. Exemplarily, the second communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device. Exemplarily, the communication device is a network device, such as a first network device. Exemplarily, the first network device is an access network device, such as a base station.
其中,如果第二通信装置为通信设备,通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者,发送器和接收器)实现,例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第二通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口,例如输入/输出管脚等,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。Wherein, if the second communication device is a communication device, the communication interface is realized by, for example, a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, the transceiver is realized by an antenna, a feeder and a receiver in the communication device. Codec and other implementations. Or, if the second communication device is a chip set in a communication device, the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
第九方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置例如为如前所述的第三通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器(或者,处理电路)和通信接口(或者,接口电路),通信接口可用于与 其他装置或设备进行通信。可选的,还可以包括存储器,用于存储计算机指令。处理器和存储器相互耦合,用于实现上述第三方面或第三方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者,第三通信装置也可以不包括存储器,存储器可以位于第三通信装置外部。处理器、存储器和通信接口相互耦合,用于实现上述第三方面或第三方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如,当处理器执行所述存储器存储的计算机指令时,使第三通信装置执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地,所述第三通信装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地,所述通信设备为网络设备,例如第二网络设备。示例性地,所述第二网络设备为接入网设备,例如基站。In a ninth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device is, for example, the aforementioned third communication device. The communication device includes a processor (or processing circuit) and a communication interface (or interface circuit), and the communication interface can be used to communicate with other devices or equipment. Optionally, it may also include a memory for storing computer instructions. The processor and the memory are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing third aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the third aspect. Alternatively, the third communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the third communication device. The processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing third aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the third aspect. For example, when the processor executes the computer instructions stored in the memory, the third communication device is caused to execute the foregoing third aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect. Exemplarily, the third communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device. Exemplarily, the communication device is a network device, such as a second network device. Exemplarily, the second network device is an access network device, such as a base station.
其中,如果第三通信装置为通信设备,通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者,发送器和接收器)实现,例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第三通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口,例如输入/输出管脚等,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。Wherein, if the third communication device is a communication device, the communication interface is realized by, for example, a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device. For example, the transceiver is realized by the antenna, feeder, and Codec and other implementations. Or, if the third communication device is a chip set in a communication device, the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
第十方面,提供第一通信系统,所述第一通信系统包括第四方面所述的通信装置或第七方面所述的通信装置。In a tenth aspect, a first communication system is provided, and the first communication system includes the communication device according to the fourth aspect or the communication device according to the seventh aspect.
第十一方面,提供第二通信系统,所述第二通信系统包括第五方面所述的通信装置或第八方面所述的通信装置,以及包括第六方面所述的通信装置或第九方面所述的通信装置。In an eleventh aspect, a second communication system is provided, the second communication system comprising the communication device according to the fifth aspect or the communication device according to the eighth aspect, and the communication device according to the sixth aspect or the ninth aspect The communication device.
第十二方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法。In a twelfth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect or the first aspect. The method described in any one of the optional implementations of the aspect.
第十三方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or the second aspect described above. The method described in any one of the optional implementations of the aspect.
第十四方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the third aspect or the third aspect described above. The method described in any one of the optional implementations of the aspect.
第十五方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法。In a fifteenth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided. The computer program product is used to store a computer program. When the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect or the first aspect. Any one of the methods described in the optional implementation mode.
第十六方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可选的施方式中所述的方法。In a sixteenth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or the second aspect described above. Any one of the methods described in the optional implementation mode.
第十七方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法。In a seventeenth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided. The computer program product is used to store a computer program. When the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the third aspect or the third aspect. Any one of the methods described in the optional implementation mode.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备释放第一字段所对应的配置,可以使得终端设备和第二网络设备应用的字段保持一致,使得终端设备在第二网络设备下能够正常通信。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the first field, which can keep the fields applied by the terminal device and the second network device consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为网络设备配置终端设备的流程图;Figure 1 is a flow chart of network equipment configuring terminal equipment;
图2为终端设备向网络设备发送UE辅助信息的流程图;Figure 2 is a flowchart of a terminal device sending UE auxiliary information to a network device;
图3为终端设备进行小区切换的示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device performing cell handover;
图4为小区切换过程的流程图;Figure 4 is a flow chart of the cell handover process;
图5为本申请实施例提供的第一种配置终端设备的方法的流程图;FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the first method for configuring terminal equipment provided by an embodiment of the application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的第二种配置终端设备的方法的流程图;FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a second method for configuring a terminal device according to an embodiment of the application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的终端设备的一种示意性框图;FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的第一网络设备的一种示意性框图;FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a first network device according to an embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的第二网络设备的一种示意性框图;FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a second network device according to an embodiment of this application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的一种示意性框图;FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的另一示意性框图;FIG. 11 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of this application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的又一示意性框图;FIG. 12 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of this application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的再一示意性框图。FIG. 13 is still another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
具体实施方式detailed description
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。In order to make the objectives, technical solutions, and advantages of the embodiments of the present application clearer, the embodiments of the present application will be further described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
以下,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。Hereinafter, some terms in the embodiments of the present application will be explained to facilitate the understanding of those skilled in the art.
1)终端设备,包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,具体的,包括向用户提供语音的设备,或包括向用户提供数据连通性的设备,或包括向用户提供语音和数据连通性的设备。例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与核心网进行通信,与RAN交换语音或数据,或与RAN交互语音和数据。该终端设备可以包括用户设备(user equipment,UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)终端设备、车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things,IoT)终端设备、签约单元(subscriber unit)、签约站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。例如,可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话),具有移动终端设备的计算机,便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的移动装置等。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、等设备。还包括受限设备,例如功耗较低的设备,或存储能力有限的设备,或计算能力有限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification,RFID)、传感器、全球定位系统(global positioning system,GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。1) Terminal devices, including devices that provide users with voice and/or data connectivity, specifically, include devices that provide users with voice, or include devices that provide users with data connectivity, or include devices that provide users with voice and data connectivity Sexual equipment. For example, it may include a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem. The terminal device can communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), exchange voice or data with the RAN, or exchange voice and data with the RAN. The terminal equipment may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle to everything (V2X) terminal equipment , Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit, subscriber unit station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user Agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc. For example, it may include mobile phones (or "cellular" phones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, mobile devices with built-in computers, and so on. For example, personal communication service (PCS) phone, cordless phone, session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), and other equipment. It also includes restricted devices, such as devices with low power consumption, or devices with limited storage capabilities, or devices with limited computing capabilities. Examples include barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅 是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。As an example and not a limitation, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is the general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes Wait. A wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable device is not only a kind of hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction and cloud interaction. In a broad sense, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
而如上介绍的各种终端设备,如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内),都可以认为是车载终端设备,车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit,OBU)。The various terminal devices introduced above, if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be considered as vehicle-mounted terminal equipment. The vehicle-mounted terminal equipment is, for example, also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以包括中继(relay)。或者理解为,能够与基站进行数据通信的都可以看作终端设备。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also include a relay. Or it can be understood that everything that can communicate with the base station can be regarded as a terminal device.
本申请实施例中,用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备,也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在终端设备中。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现终端的功能的装置是终端设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In the embodiments of the present application, the device used to implement the function of the terminal device may be a terminal device, or a device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the terminal device. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices. In the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, the device for implementing the functions of the terminal is a terminal device as an example to describe the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
2)网络设备,例如包括接入网(access network,AN)设备,例如基站(例如,接入点),可以是指接入网中在空口通过一个或多个小区与无线终端设备通信的设备,或者例如,一种车到一切(vehicle-to-everything,V2X)技术中的网络设备为路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)。基站可用于将收到的空中帧与IP分组进行相互转换,作为终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器,其中接入网的其余部分可包括IP网络。RSU可以是支持V2X应用的固定基础设施实体,可以与支持V2X应用的其他实体交换消息。网络设备还可协调对空口的属性管理。例如,网络设备可以包括LTE系统或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB,evolutional Node B),或者也可以包括第五代移动通信技术(the 5th generation,5G)新空口(new radio,NR)系统(也简称为NR系统)中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNB)或者也可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network,Cloud RAN)系统中的集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),本申请实施例并不限定。2) Network equipment, including, for example, access network (AN) equipment, such as a base station (e.g., access point), which can refer to equipment that communicates with wireless terminal equipment through one or more cells on the air interface in the access network Or, for example, a network device in a vehicle-to-everything (V2X) technology is a roadside unit (RSU). The base station can be used to convert received air frames and IP packets into each other, and act as a router between the terminal device and the rest of the access network, where the rest of the access network can include the IP network. The RSU can be a fixed infrastructure entity that supports V2X applications, and can exchange messages with other entities that support V2X applications. The network equipment can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface. For example, the network equipment may include the evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in the LTE system or the long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A), or may also include the fifth-generation mobile Communication technology (the 5th generation, 5G) new radio (NR) system (also referred to as the NR system) next generation node B (next generation node B, gNB) or may also include cloud radio The centralized unit (CU) and distributed unit (DU) in the access network (Cloud RAN) system are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
网络设备还可以包括核心网设备,核心网设备例如包括5G系统中的访问和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)或用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)等,或者包括4G系统中的移动管理实体(mobility management entity,MME)等。The network equipment may also include core network equipment. The core network equipment includes, for example, access and mobility management functions (AMF), session management functions (SMF) or user plane functions in the 5G system. function, UPF), etc., or include the mobility management entity (MME) in the 4G system.
本申请实施例中,用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备,也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In the embodiments of the present application, the device used to implement the function of the network device may be a network device, or a device capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device. In the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application, the device used to implement the functions of the network equipment is a network device as an example to describe the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application.
由于本申请实施例提供的技术方案主要涉及接入网设备,因此如无特殊说明,则下文所述的网络设备,均是指接入网设备。Since the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application mainly involve access network equipment, unless otherwise specified, the network equipment described below all refer to the access network equipment.
3)本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。例如,A/B,表示:A或B。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中 的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。3) The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of this application can be used interchangeably. "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated object, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. For example, A/B means: A or B. "The following at least one item (a)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a). For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple .
以及,除非有相反的说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的大小、内容、顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度等。例如,第一配置信息和第二配置信息,可以是同一个配置信息,也可以是不同的配置信息,且,这种名称也并不是表示这两个配置信息的信息量大小、内容、优先级或者重要程度等的不同。And, unless otherwise stated, the ordinal numbers such as "first" and "second" mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the size, content, order, and timing of multiple objects. , Priority or importance, etc. For example, the first configuration information and the second configuration information can be the same configuration information or different configuration information, and this name does not indicate the size, content, and priority of the two configuration information. Or the degree of importance is different.
前文介绍了本申请实施例所涉及到的一些名词概念,下面介绍本申请实施例涉及的技术特征。The foregoing introduces some terms and concepts involved in the embodiments of the present application, and the technical features involved in the embodiments of the present application are introduced below.
当终端设备接入到网络设备后,网络设备需要给终端设备下发无线接入配置,终端设备应用网络设备下发的配置,使得终端设备在该网络设备下可以正常进行数据通信。请参考图1,为网络设备配置终端设备的流程图。After the terminal device is connected to the network device, the network device needs to issue a wireless access configuration to the terminal device, and the terminal device applies the configuration issued by the network device, so that the terminal device can perform data communication normally under the network device. Please refer to Figure 1 for the flow chart of configuring terminal devices for network devices.
S11、网络设备向终端设备发送配置消息,相应的,终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置消息。S11. The network device sends a configuration message to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the configuration message from the network device.
示例性的,该配置消息里可以是无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)重配置(RRC reconfiguration)消息,或者是RRC建立(RRC setup)消息,或者是RRC重建(RRC reestablishment)消息,或者是RRC恢复(RRC resume)消息等。该配置消息可包括网络设备为终端设备配置的参数,示例性的,配置的参数可以包括:无线承载的配置参数、物理层(physical layer,PHY)参数、媒介接入控制层(medium access control,MAC)参数、无线链路控制层(radio link control,RLC)参数、或安全参数中的一种或多种。Exemplarily, the configuration message may be a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) reconfiguration (RRC reconfiguration) message, or an RRC setup (RRC setup) message, or an RRC reestablishment (RRC reestablishment) message, or RRC resume (RRC resume) messages, etc. The configuration message may include the parameters configured by the network device for the terminal device. For example, the configured parameters may include: radio bearer configuration parameters, physical layer (PHY) parameters, medium access control layer (medium access control, One or more of MAC) parameters, radio link control (RLC) parameters, or security parameters.
其中,网络设备可能会多次向终端设备发送配置消息,因此,某一次所发送的配置消息是可以基于前一次的配置消息再进一步配置的,即,网络设备采用的是相对配置(delta configuration)的方式。具体的,配置消息可包括一个或多个IE,每一个IE即为一个域(field)或者为一个字段,一个IE可以理解为一个参数,或者理解为一个IE包括一个参数。在配置消息中,每个IE都可以对应相应的需求码(need codes),不同的IE对应的需求码可能相同,也可能不同。关于需求码,可参考表1的介绍。Among them, the network device may send configuration messages to the terminal device multiple times. Therefore, the configuration message sent at a certain time can be further configured based on the previous configuration message, that is, the network device adopts a relative configuration (delta configuration) The way. Specifically, the configuration message may include one or more IEs, each IE is a field or a field, and an IE may be understood as a parameter, or it may be understood as an IE including a parameter. In the configuration message, each IE can correspond to corresponding need codes, and the need codes corresponding to different IEs may be the same or different. For the requirement code, please refer to the introduction in Table 1.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2021078746-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021078746-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021078746-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021078746-appb-000002
表1列举了4种需求码。例如,如果一个字段对应的需求码为需求码R(即,need R),则该字段是需要继承的字段,通过该字段配置的参数可认为是非一次性的参数。即,如果终端设备之前接收了该字段,但本次未接收该字段,那么终端设备就需要释放之前接收的该字段对应的配置,即,终端设备不会继续应用之前接收的该字段对应的配置。而如果终端设备之前接收了该字段,而本次也接收了该字段,则终端设备需要应用本次接收的该字段对应的配置。Table 1 lists 4 kinds of demand codes. For example, if the requirement code corresponding to a field is the requirement code R (ie, need R), then this field is a field that needs to be inherited, and the parameters configured through this field can be regarded as non-one-time parameters. That is, if the terminal device previously received the field, but did not receive the field this time, the terminal device needs to release the configuration corresponding to the field previously received, that is, the terminal device will not continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the field previously received . And if the terminal device has received this field before, and this field is also received this time, the terminal device needs to apply the configuration corresponding to the field received this time.
又例如,如果一个字段对应的需求码为需求码M(即,need M),则该字段就是需要继承的字段,通过该字段配置的参数可认为是非一次性的参数。即,如果终端设备之前接收了该字段,但本次未接收该字段,那么终端设备就需要继续应用之前接收的该字段对应的配置,即,需要继续应用之前接收的该字段所包括的参数。而如果终端设备之前接收了该字段,而本次也接收了该字段,则终端设备需要应用本次接收的该字段对应的配置。For another example, if the demand code corresponding to a field is the demand code M (ie, need M), the field is the field that needs to be inherited, and the parameters configured through the field can be considered as non-one-time parameters. That is, if the terminal device previously received this field, but did not receive this field this time, the terminal device needs to continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the field received before, that is, it needs to continue to apply the parameters included in the previously received field. And if the terminal device has received this field before, and this field is also received this time, the terminal device needs to apply the configuration corresponding to the field received this time.
例如,网络设备首先向终端设备发送了配置消息1,配置消息1包括IE1、IE2和IE3,其中,IE1对应的需求码为need M,IE2和IE3对应的需求码均为need R,则终端设备应 用IE1对应的配置、IE2对应的配置以及IE3对应的配置。之后,网络设备又向终端设备发送配置消息2,配置消息2是根据配置消息1所进一步配置的。例如配置消息2包括IE2和IE4,IE4对应的需求码为需求码N。因为配置消息2重新下发了IE2,则终端设备应用配置消息2所包括的IE2对应的配置,以及,配置消息2新下发了IE4,则终端设备应用配置消息2所包括的IE4对应的配置。另外,配置消息2不包括IE1,但配置消息1包括IE1,且IE1对应的需求码为need M,因此,终端设备继续应用配置消息1所包括的IE1对应的配置。配置消息2不包括IE3,且IE3对应的需求码为need R,因此终端设备释放配置消息1所包括的IE3对应的配置,即,终端设备不会应用配置消息1所包括的IE3对应的配置。For example, the network device first sends configuration message 1 to the terminal device. Configuration message 1 includes IE1, IE2, and IE3, where the demand code corresponding to IE1 is needM, and the demand code corresponding to IE2 and IE3 are both needR, then the terminal equipment Apply the configuration corresponding to IE1, the configuration corresponding to IE2, and the configuration corresponding to IE3. After that, the network device sends a configuration message 2 to the terminal device, and the configuration message 2 is further configured according to the configuration message 1. For example, the configuration message 2 includes IE2 and IE4, and the demand code corresponding to IE4 is the demand code N. Because configuration message 2 is re-issued with IE2, the terminal device applies the configuration corresponding to IE2 included in configuration message 2, and if IE4 is newly issued in configuration message 2, the terminal device applies the configuration corresponding to IE4 included in configuration message 2. . In addition, configuration message 2 does not include IE1, but configuration message 1 includes IE1, and the demand code corresponding to IE1 is need M. Therefore, the terminal device continues to apply the configuration corresponding to IE1 included in configuration message 1. The configuration message 2 does not include IE3, and the demand code corresponding to IE3 is need R. Therefore, the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to IE3 included in the configuration message 1, that is, the terminal device does not apply the configuration corresponding to IE3 included in the configuration message 1.
S12、终端设备应用该配置消息所包括的配置。根据该配置,终端设备在当前的网络设备下可以正常进行数据通信。S12. The terminal device applies the configuration included in the configuration message. According to this configuration, the terminal device can perform data communication normally under the current network device.
另外,终端设备在使用过程中,可能会出现过热等现象。那么,当终端设备出现设备内部过热问题,可以通过降低终端设备的能力或配置来降温,以解决过热问题。为了降低终端设备的能力或配置,终端设备可以向网络设备发送UE辅助信息(UE assistance information),该UE辅助信息为过热辅助信息,以将终端设备期望降低的能力或配置通知网络设备,供网络设备参考,以进行重配置。终端设备要向网络设备发送UE辅助信息,需要网络设备先向终端设备发送过热配置信息,从而终端设备才能向网络设备发送UE辅助信息。网络设备向终端设备发送的过热配置信息,就可以包括在网络设备向终端设备发送的配置消息中,例如图1所示的流程中的S11所示的配置消息。下面请参考图2,介绍终端设备向网络设备发送UE辅助信息的流程。In addition, the terminal device may overheat during use. Then, when the terminal device has an overheating problem inside the device, the temperature of the terminal device can be reduced by reducing the capacity or configuration of the terminal device to solve the overheating problem. In order to reduce the capability or configuration of the terminal device, the terminal device can send UE assistance information to the network device. The UE assistance information is overheating assistance information to notify the network device of the expected reduced capability or configuration of the terminal device for the network device. Device reference for reconfiguration. In order for a terminal device to send UE auxiliary information to the network device, the network device needs to send the overheating configuration information to the terminal device first, so that the terminal device can send the UE auxiliary information to the network device. The overheating configuration information sent by the network device to the terminal device may be included in the configuration message sent by the network device to the terminal device, such as the configuration message shown in S11 in the process shown in FIG. 1. Please refer to FIG. 2 below to introduce the process of sending UE auxiliary information from a terminal device to a network device.
S21、网络设备向终端设备发送RRC重配置消息,终端设备接收来自网络设备的RRC重配置消息。S21. The network device sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the RRC reconfiguration message from the network device.
该RRC重配置消息可以理解为配置消息,该RRC重配置消息可以包括过热配置信息。过热配置信息例如包括,用于指示终端设备是否能够向网络设备发送过热辅助信息的信息,以及过热相关的禁止定时器的取值等。其中,禁止定时器是网络设备用于控制终端设备上报过热辅助信息频率的,当终端设备上报一次过热辅助信息后,终端设备和网络设备需要同步开启该禁止定时器,在该禁止定时器运行的过程中,终端设备不能再次上报过热辅助信息,只能在该禁止定时器超时时或超时后再次上报过热辅助信息。已有协议中规定的该禁止定时器的取值可以在一个范围中选取,该范围为{s0,s0dot5,s1,s2,s5,s10,s20,s30,s60,s90,s120,s300,s600,spare3,spare2,spare1},其中,s表示单位为秒,例如s0表示0秒,s1表示1秒。s0dot5表示0.5秒,空闲(spare)表示预留位,例如spare3、spare2和spare表示三个预留位。The RRC reconfiguration message may be understood as a configuration message, and the RRC reconfiguration message may include overheating configuration information. The overheating configuration information includes, for example, information used to indicate whether the terminal device can send overheating auxiliary information to the network device, and the value of a prohibition timer related to overheating. Among them, the prohibition timer is used by the network device to control the frequency of the terminal device reporting the overheating auxiliary information. After the terminal device reports the overheating auxiliary information once, the terminal device and the network device need to start the prohibition timer synchronously. During the process, the terminal device cannot report the auxiliary overheating information again, and can only report the auxiliary overheating information again when or after the prohibition timer expires. The value of the prohibit timer specified in the existing agreement can be selected in a range, which is {s0,s0dot5,s1,s2,s5,s10,s20,s30,s60,s90,s120,s300,s600, spare3,spare2,spare1}, where s means the unit is seconds, for example, s0 means 0 seconds, s1 means 1 second. s0dot5 means 0.5 seconds, and spare means reserved bits. For example, spare3, spare2, and spare mean three reserved bits.
其中,网络设备向终端设备发送的过热配置信息,可以包括在一个或多个IE中,这一个或多个IE对应的需求码可以是need M。Wherein, the overheating configuration information sent by the network device to the terminal device may be included in one or more IEs, and the demand code corresponding to the one or more IEs may be needM.
S22、终端设备向网络设备发送过热辅助信息,网络设备接收来自终端设备的过热辅助信息。S22. The terminal device sends the auxiliary overheating information to the network device, and the network device receives the auxiliary overheating information from the terminal device.
若网络设备发送的过热配置信息用于配置终端设备能够发送过热相关的辅助信息,那么,当终端设备出现过热问题,终端设备可以向网络设备发送过热辅助信息。或者,若网络设备发送的过热配置信息用于配置终端设备能够发送过热相关的辅助信息,那么,当终端设备出现过热问题,且禁止定时器未处于运行状态,终端设备可以向网络设备发送过热 辅助信息。例如,终端设备可以将过热辅助信息包括在UE辅助信息消息中发送给网络设备。If the overheating configuration information sent by the network device is used to configure the terminal device to be able to send the auxiliary information related to overheating, then when the terminal device has an overheating problem, the terminal device can send the overheating auxiliary information to the network device. Or, if the overheating configuration information sent by the network device is used to configure the terminal device to be able to send overheat-related auxiliary information, then when the terminal device has an overheating problem and the prohibit timer is not running, the terminal device can send overheating assistance to the network device information. For example, the terminal device may include the overheating assistance information in the UE assistance information message and send it to the network device.
在NR独立组网、NR-DC或NE-DC等场景中,终端设备能够上报的过热辅助信息可包括如下一项或多项:该终端设备支持的上行最大辅(secondary)载波(component carrier,CC)数量或上行最大辅小区(secondary cell,SCell)数量,终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量,终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽,终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽,终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层(layer)数,或,终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数。在(NG)EN-DC等场景中,终端设备能够上报的过热辅助信息包括:终端设备的类型(UE category),和/或,终端设备支持的MIMO层数。In scenarios such as NR independent networking, NR-DC, or NE-DC, the overheating assistance information that a terminal device can report may include one or more of the following: The maximum uplink secondary carrier supported by the terminal device (component carrier, The number of CC) or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells (secondary cells, SCell), the maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device, the maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each frequency band supported, The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that a terminal device can support in each supported frequency band, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of the terminal device in each frequency band supported, or the terminal device The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell on each supported frequency band. In scenarios such as (NG)EN-DC, the overheating assistance information that the terminal device can report includes: the type of the terminal device (UE category), and/or the number of MIMO layers supported by the terminal device.
S23、网络设备向终端设备发送RRC重配置消息,终端设备接收来自网络设备的RRC重配置消息。S23. The network device sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the RRC reconfiguration message from the network device.
若网络设备接收了来自终端设备的过热辅助信息,网络设备可以决策是否要降低该终端设备的空口配置,从而缓解该终端设备的过热问题。至于如何决策,取决于网络设备的内部实现。若网络设备决定降低终端设备的空口配置,网络设备可以根据接收的过热辅助信息确定配置信息,并将配置信息包括在RRC重配置消息中发送给终端设备,终端设备应用该配置信息,就能降低终端设备的空口配置。终端设备使用降低的空口配置进行通信后,功率消耗降低,则终端设备的温度也会降低,从而解决了过热问题。If the network device receives the overheating auxiliary information from the terminal device, the network device can decide whether to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, thereby alleviating the overheating problem of the terminal device. As for how to make a decision, it depends on the internal implementation of the network equipment. If the network device decides to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, the network device can determine the configuration information according to the received overheating auxiliary information, and include the configuration information in the RRC reconfiguration message and send it to the terminal device. The terminal device can reduce the configuration information by applying the configuration information. The air interface configuration of the terminal device. After the terminal device uses the reduced air interface configuration for communication, the power consumption is reduced, and the temperature of the terminal device is also reduced, thereby solving the problem of overheating.
由于有些终端设备处于移动状态,例如手机等终端设备,因此终端设备会涉及到进行小区切换。小区切换可以包括基站内的小区切换和跨基站的小区切换,跨基站的小区切换是指,当终端设备从一个基站(源基站)的覆盖区移动到另一个基站(目标基站)的覆盖区,将改变该终端设备原有的通信连接,而转接到另一条通信连接,以使得该终端设备继续保持与基站的通信连接。本申请实施例主要考虑跨基站的小区切换,下文所述“小区切换”可理解为“跨基站的小区切换”。例如可参考图3,为终端设备进行小区切换的示意图。从图3可以看出,终端设备需要从源基站切换到目标基站。另外,请再参考图4,为小区切换过程的流程图,在图4中未给出核心网侧的操作。Since some terminal devices are in a mobile state, such as mobile phones and other terminal devices, the terminal devices will be involved in cell handover. Cell handover can include cell handover within a base station and cell handover across base stations. Inter-base station cell handover refers to when a terminal device moves from the coverage area of one base station (source base station) to the coverage area of another base station (target base station). The original communication connection of the terminal device will be changed and switched to another communication connection, so that the terminal device continues to maintain the communication connection with the base station. The embodiments of the present application mainly consider cell handover across base stations, and the “cell handover” described below can be understood as “cell handover across base stations”. For example, refer to FIG. 3, which is a schematic diagram of cell handover for terminal equipment. It can be seen from Figure 3 that the terminal equipment needs to be handed over from the source base station to the target base station. In addition, please refer to Figure 4 again, which is a flow chart of the cell handover process. Figure 4 does not show the operation of the core network side.
S41、源基站向目标基站发送切换准备信息(handover preparation information)消息,目标基站接收来自源基站的切换准备信息消息。该切换准备信息消息用于指示将终端设备从源基站切换到目标基站。S41. The source base station sends a handover preparation information (handover preparation information) message to the target base station, and the target base station receives the handover preparation information message from the source base station. The handover preparation information message is used to instruct the terminal device to be handed over from the source base station to the target base station.
其中,在终端设备进行小区切换前,即,在执行S41之前,源基站会给终端设备下发配置信息,例如称为配置信息1,配置信息1可包括一个或多个IE,配置信息1用于终端设备在源基站下通信。Among them, before the terminal device performs cell handover, that is, before performing S41, the source base station will issue configuration information to the terminal device, for example, called configuration information 1. The configuration information 1 may include one or more IEs, and the configuration information 1 is used for The terminal equipment communicates under the source base station.
在小区切换过程中,源基站会将配置信息1发送给目标基站。例如,源基站可将配置信息1包括在切换准备信息消息中发送给目标基站。During the cell handover process, the source base station will send configuration information 1 to the target base station. For example, the source base station may include the configuration information 1 in the handover preparation information message and send it to the target base station.
S42、目标基站进行准入控制。即,目标基站确定是否允许该终端设备切换到目标基站。S42. The target base station performs admission control. That is, the target base station determines whether to allow the terminal device to switch to the target base station.
S43、若目标基站允许该终端设备切换到目标基站,目标基站向源基站发送切换控制(handover command)消息,源基站接收来自目标基站的切换控制消息。S43. If the target base station allows the terminal device to switch to the target base station, the target base station sends a handover control (handover command) message to the source base station, and the source base station receives the handover control message from the target base station.
切换控制消息可指示目标基站允许将该终端设备切换到目标基站。The handover control message may indicate that the target base station allows the terminal device to be handed over to the target base station.
S44、源基站向终端设备发送RRC重配置(RRC reconfiguration)消息,终端设备接收来自源基站的RRC重配置消息。S44. The source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration (RRC reconfiguration) message to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the RRC reconfiguration message from the source base station.
该RRC重配置消息也可以称为切换命令,可指示该终端设备从源基站切换到目标基站。The RRC reconfiguration message may also be referred to as a handover command, which may instruct the terminal device to switch from the source base station to the target base station.
在小区切换过程中,目标基站也会给终端设备下发配置信息,例如称为配置信息2,配置信息2可包括一个或多个IE,配置信息2用于该终端设备在目标基站下通信,配置信息2可以是根据配置信息1确定的。例如,目标基站可将配置信息2包括在S43的切换控制消息中发送给源基站,源基站再将配置信息2包括在S44的RRC重配置消息中发送给终端设备。During the cell handover process, the target base station will also issue configuration information to the terminal device, for example called configuration information 2. The configuration information 2 may include one or more IEs, and the configuration information 2 is used for the terminal device to communicate under the target base station. The configuration information 2 may be determined according to the configuration information 1. For example, the target base station may include the configuration information 2 in the handover control message in S43 and send it to the source base station, and the source base station may then include the configuration information 2 in the RRC reconfiguration message in S44 and send it to the terminal device.
S45、终端设备进行切换操作,以从源基站切换到目标基站,或者说,从当前的服务小区转换到新小区。S45. The terminal device performs a handover operation to switch from the source base station to the target base station, or in other words, switch from the current serving cell to the new cell.
S46、终端设备向目标基站发送RRC重配置完成(RRC reconfiguration complete)消息,目标基站接收来自终端设备的RRC重配置完成消息。S46. The terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete (RRC reconfiguration complete) message to the target base station, and the target base station receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the terminal device.
RRC重配置完成可指示终端设备已切换完成。The completion of RRC reconfiguration can indicate that the terminal device has been switched.
通过图4所示的流程,终端设备就完成了小区切换过程。当终端设备切换到目标基站后,可应用配置信息2。Through the process shown in Figure 4, the terminal equipment completes the cell handover process. After the terminal device switches to the target base station, the configuration information 2 can be applied.
各个基站支持的通信版本可能会有所不同,因此源基站和目标基站的通信版本可能是不同的。例如,源基站的通信版本可能会高于目标基站的通信版本。由于高版本的基站支持的功能比低版本的基站支持的功能多,因此高版本的基站能够配置更多的IE,但低版本基站因为不具备新功能,因此也无法识别新功能对应的IE。目标基站由于无法识别这些IE,因此不会将这些IE发送给终端设备。但是有些IE对应的需求码为need M,例如包括了过热配置信息的IE,那么,如果终端设备上次接收了该IE,但本次未接收该IE,表明终端设备需要继续应用上次接收的该IE所对应的配置。对于这类IE,如果终端设备确定源基站向终端设备发送了该IE,而目标基站未向终端设备发送该IE,终端设备就会继续使用来自源基站的该IE对应的配置。而目标基站无法识别该IE,自然无法支持该IE对应的配置,这就可能导致终端设备在目标基站下无法正常通信。The communication version supported by each base station may be different, so the communication version of the source base station and the target base station may be different. For example, the communication version of the source base station may be higher than the communication version of the target base station. Since the base station of the higher version supports more functions than the base station of the lower version, the base station of the higher version can be configured with more IEs, but the base station of the lower version cannot recognize the IE corresponding to the new function because it does not have new functions. Since the target base station cannot recognize these IEs, it will not send these IEs to the terminal device. However, some IEs correspond to the demand code need M, such as the IE that includes overheating configuration information. If the terminal device received the IE last time, but did not receive the IE this time, it indicates that the terminal device needs to continue to apply the last received IE. The configuration corresponding to this IE. For this type of IE, if the terminal device determines that the source base station has sent the IE to the terminal device, but the target base station has not sent the IE to the terminal device, the terminal device will continue to use the configuration corresponding to the IE from the source base station. However, the target base station cannot recognize the IE, and naturally cannot support the configuration corresponding to the IE, which may cause the terminal device to fail to communicate normally under the target base station.
鉴于此,提供本申请实施例的技术方案。例如,第一字段是需要继承的字段,即,如果终端设备上次接收了第一字段,但本次未接收第一字段,那么终端设备就需要继续应用上次接收的第一字段对应的配置,或者说,第一字段对应的需求码为need M。那么在本申请实施例中,终端设备如果确定来自第一网络设备的第一配置信息包括第一字段,且来自第二网络设备的第一配置信息不包括第一字段,则终端设备就可以释放第一配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置,即,终端设备不再应用之前接收的第一字段所对应的配置。第二网络设备未向终端设备发送第一字段,很可能是因为第二网络设备无法识别第一字段,因此终端设备释放第一字段所对应的配置,可以使得终端设备和第二网络设备应用的字段保持一致,使得终端设备在第二网络设备下能够正常通信。In view of this, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are provided. For example, the first field is a field that needs to be inherited, that is, if the terminal device received the first field last time, but did not receive the first field this time, then the terminal device needs to continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field received last time , In other words, the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M. Then in this embodiment of the application, if the terminal device determines that the first configuration information from the first network device includes the first field, and the first configuration information from the second network device does not include the first field, the terminal device can release The configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information, that is, the terminal device no longer applies the previously received configuration corresponding to the first field. The second network device did not send the first field to the terminal device. It is probably because the second network device cannot recognize the first field. Therefore, the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the first field, which can make the terminal device and the second network device apply The fields are kept consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
例如,当用户边走边持智能手机进行通话业务时,由于用户的移动可能导致智能手机进行小区切换。而由于上述问题,可能导致智能手机切换到目标基站下无法正常通信,即智能手机可能会出现通话信号不好、通话中断、或通话掉话等情况,影响用户的体验。而采用本申请实施例提供的方案,就能解决这些问题。例如,在采用本申请实施例提供的方案后,例如用户边走边持智能手机进行通话业务,由于用户的移动可能导致智能手机进行 小区切换,但在本申请实施例中,智能手机即使切换到目标基站下,由于智能手机的实际配置与目标基站所知晓的智能手机的配置能够尽量保持一致,因此智能手机在目标基站下也能够正常通信。也就是说,采用本申请实施例提供的技术方案,能够减小智能手机在进行小区切换后出现通话信号不好、通话中断、或通话掉话等情况的概率,提高通信质量,也提高用户体验。For example, when a user is holding a smart phone for a call service while walking, the smart phone may perform a cell handover due to the user's movement. However, due to the above problems, the smart phone may not be able to communicate normally when it is switched to the target base station, that is, the smart phone may have poor call signals, call interruptions, or call drops, which affects user experience. These problems can be solved by adopting the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application. For example, after adopting the solution provided in the embodiment of this application, for example, the user is holding a smart phone while walking for a call service, the user’s movement may cause the smart phone to perform cell handover, but in the embodiment of this application, even if the smart phone is switched to the target Under the base station, since the actual configuration of the smart phone can be as consistent as possible with the configuration of the smart phone known by the target base station, the smart phone can also communicate normally under the target base station. That is to say, the technical solution provided by the embodiments of the present application can reduce the probability of poor call signal, call interruption, or call dropped after the smart phone performs cell handover, improve communication quality, and improve user experience. .
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于第四代移动通信技术(the 4th generation,4G)系统中,例如LTE系统,或可以应用于5G系统中,例如NR系统,或者还可以应用于下一代移动通信系统或其他类似的通信系统,具体的不做限制。另外本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)场景,例如NR-D2D场景等,或者可以应用于车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)场景,例如NR-V2X场景等,例如可应用于车联网,例如V2X、车与车(vehicle-to-vehicle,V2V)等,或可用于智能驾驶、辅助驾驶、或智能网联车等领域。The technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application can be applied to the fourth generation mobile communication technology (the 4th generation, 4G) system, such as the LTE system, or can be applied to the 5G system, such as the NR system, or can also be applied to the next generation Mobile communication systems or other similar communication systems are not specifically restricted. In addition, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application can be applied to device-to-device (D2D) scenarios, such as NR-D2D scenarios, etc., or can be applied to vehicle to everything (V2X) scenarios, such as NR-V2X scenes, etc., for example, can be applied to the Internet of Vehicles, such as V2X, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), etc., or can be used in fields such as intelligent driving, assisted driving, or intelligent networked vehicles.
本申请实施例的一种应用场景可继续参考图3。图3中的基站,可以是一种接入网设备。其中,接入网设备在不同的系统对应不同的设备,例如在4G系统中可以对应eNB,在5G系统中对应5G中的接入网设备,例如gNB。当然本申请实施例所提供的技术方案也可以应用于未来的移动通信系统中,因此接入网设备也可以对应未来的移动通信系统中的网络设备。图3以接入网设备是基站为例,实际上参考前文的介绍,接入网设备还可以是RSU等设备。An application scenario of the embodiment of the present application can continue to refer to FIG. 3. The base station in Figure 3 may be an access network device. Among them, the access network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems. For example, in a 4G system, it can correspond to an eNB, and in a 5G system, it corresponds to an access network equipment in 5G, such as gNB. Of course, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to future mobile communication systems, so the access network equipment can also correspond to network equipment in future mobile communication systems. Figure 3 takes the access network equipment as a base station as an example. In fact, referring to the previous introduction, the access network equipment may also be equipment such as RSU.
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例所提供的方法。需要注意的是,本申请的各个实施例中,凡是涉及到终端设备与核心网设备之间的信息交互,都可以通过接入网设备从中转发,只是因为本申请实施例的方案不涉及核心网设备,因此在下文未提及。另外,本申请的各个实施例所述的配置信息,例如第一配置信息、第二配置信息、第三配置信息或第四配置信息等,均可包括网络设备为终端设备配置的参数,使得终端设备能够在该网络设备下工作。示例性的,网络设备为终端设备配置的参数可以包括无线承载的配置参数、物理层参数、MAC参数、RLC参数、或安全参数中的一种或多种,或者还可以包括其他参数。The following describes the method provided by the embodiment of the present application with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be noted that in the various embodiments of this application, all information interactions between the terminal device and the core network device can be forwarded from it through the access network device, just because the solution in the embodiment of this application does not involve the core network. Equipment, so it is not mentioned below. In addition, the configuration information described in the various embodiments of the present application, such as the first configuration information, the second configuration information, the third configuration information, or the fourth configuration information, can all include the parameters configured by the network device for the terminal device, so that the terminal The device can work under the network device. Exemplarily, the parameters configured by the network device for the terminal device may include one or more of radio bearer configuration parameters, physical layer parameters, MAC parameters, RLC parameters, or security parameters, or may also include other parameters.
本申请实施例提供第一种配置终端设备的方法,请参见图5,为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中,以该方法应用于图3所示的网络架构为例。The embodiment of the present application provides a first method for configuring a terminal device. Please refer to FIG. 5, which is a flowchart of this method. In the following introduction process, the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 3 is taken as an example.
为了便于介绍,在下文中,以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例。下文所述的第一网络设备为终端设备的源网络设备,即,终端设备在进行小区切换前所接入的网络设备,下文所述的第二网络设备为终端设备的目标网络设备,即,终端设备在进行小区切换后所接入的网络设备。则下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3所示的网络架构中的终端设备,下文中所述的第一网络设备可以是图3所示的网络架构中的源基站,下文中所述的第二网络设备可以是图3所示的网络架构中的目标基站。For ease of introduction, in the following, the method executed by the network device and the terminal device is taken as an example. The first network device described below is the source network device of the terminal device, that is, the network device that the terminal device accesses before cell handover, and the second network device described below is the target network device of the terminal device, that is, The network equipment that the terminal equipment accesses after the cell handover. Then the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3, and the first network device described below may be the source base station in the network architecture shown in FIG. The second network device may be the target base station in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3.
S51、第一网络设备向终端设备发送第三配置信息,相应的,终端设备接收来自第一网络设备的第三配置信息。S51. The first network device sends third configuration information to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the third configuration information from the first network device.
例如,在小区切换前,作为源网络设备的第一网络设备可以向终端设备发送第三配置信息。例如第一网络设备可以在终端设备刚入网时(例如与第一网络设备完成随机接入时)向该终端设备发送第三配置信息,而在此之后,在该终端设备在第一网络设备下工作时,第一网络设备不再向该终端设备发送其他配置信息;或者,第一网络设备可以在终端设备刚入网时(例如与第一网络设备完成随机接入时)向该终端设备发送配置信息,在此之后, 在该终端设备在第一网络设备下工作时,第一网络设备还可以向该终端设备发送新的配置信息,则对于第一网络设备和终端设备来说,可以根据新的配置信息和之前的配置信息得到当前所应用的配置信息,在这种情况下,例如第三配置信息是第一网络设备最近一次向该终端设备发送的配置信息。或者,第一网络设备也可以在小区切换过程中向终端设备发送第三配置信息。例如根据前文介绍的小区切换过程可知,在小区切换过程中,源网络设备会向终端设备发送切换命令(切换命令例如为图4所示的流程中S44中的RRC重配置消息),以指示终端设备进行切换,那么第一网络设备可以将第三配置信息包括在切换命令中发送给终端设备。For example, before the cell handover, the first network device as the source network device may send the third configuration information to the terminal device. For example, the first network device may send the third configuration information to the terminal device when the terminal device just enters the network (for example, when completing random access with the first network device), and after that, the terminal device is under the first network device When working, the first network device no longer sends other configuration information to the terminal device; or, the first network device can send configuration information to the terminal device when the terminal device just enters the network (for example, when completing random access with the first network device) After that, when the terminal device is working under the first network device, the first network device can also send new configuration information to the terminal device. For the first network device and the terminal device, it can be based on the new configuration information. The configuration information of and the previous configuration information obtains the currently applied configuration information. In this case, for example, the third configuration information is the most recent configuration information sent by the first network device to the terminal device. Alternatively, the first network device may also send the third configuration information to the terminal device during the cell handover process. For example, according to the cell handover process introduced above, during the cell handover process, the source network device sends a handover command to the terminal device (the handover command is, for example, the RRC reconfiguration message in S44 in the process shown in Figure 4) to instruct the terminal The device switches, then the first network device may include the third configuration information in the switching command and send it to the terminal device.
在前文介绍了,目前的配置过程都是迭代式的配置,或者说是继承制的配置,即,基于前一次的配置进行后一次的配置。那么,例如第三配置信息是第一网络设备最近一次向该终端设备发送的配置信息,或者说,第一网络设备在向终端设备发送第三配置信息之前已经向终端设备发送了其他配置信息,例如第四配置信息,那么第三配置信息是基于第四配置信息所做的进一步的配置,因此,终端设备可以根据第三配置信息和第四配置信息确定终端设备所应用的配置信息,将该配置信息称为第一配置信息。终端设备可以应用第一配置信息进行配置,可以使得终端设备在第一网络设备下可以正常进行数据通信。As mentioned in the previous article, the current configuration process is iterative configuration, or the configuration of inheritance system, that is, the configuration of the next is based on the previous configuration. Then, for example, the third configuration information is the configuration information that the first network device recently sent to the terminal device, or in other words, the first network device has already sent other configuration information to the terminal device before sending the third configuration information to the terminal device, For example, the fourth configuration information, then the third configuration information is a further configuration based on the fourth configuration information. Therefore, the terminal device can determine the configuration information applied by the terminal device according to the third configuration information and the fourth configuration information, The configuration information is referred to as the first configuration information. The terminal device can be configured using the first configuration information, so that the terminal device can normally perform data communication under the first network device.
第一配置信息可以包括一个或多个字段,字段例如为IE,或者为域,或者也可以是其他概念,可理解为,一个字段包括一个或多个比特(bit)。第三配置信息所包括的字段,每个字段都可以对应一个需求码,不同的字段对应的需求码可能相同,也可能不同。另外,每个字段都可以包括一个参数。例如,第一配置信息可包括第一字段,第一字段例如包括一个参数,或者说,包括相应的信息。对于终端设备来说,如果未接收第一字段,则需要继承(或,应用)上次接收的第一字段的内容,或者说,需要继续应用上次接收的第一字段的内容对应的配置,或者说,需要继续应用第一参数。例如,第一字段对应的需求码为need M,那么第一字段就是需要继承的字段。例如,第一字段可以包括过热配置信息,或者,第一字段也可以包括其他信息。The first configuration information may include one or more fields, such as an IE, or a domain, or other concepts. It can be understood that a field includes one or more bits. For the fields included in the third configuration information, each field may correspond to a demand code, and the demand codes corresponding to different fields may be the same or different. In addition, each field can include a parameter. For example, the first configuration information may include a first field, and the first field includes, for example, a parameter, or in other words, includes corresponding information. For the terminal device, if the first field is not received, it needs to inherit (or apply) the content of the first field received last time, or in other words, it needs to continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the content of the first field received last time. In other words, the first parameter needs to be applied continuously. For example, if the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M, then the first field is the field that needs to be inherited. For example, the first field may include overheating configuration information, or the first field may also include other information.
过热配置信息例如包括第一指示信息,或包括禁止定时器的定时时长,或包括第一指示信息和禁止定时器的定时时长。其中,第一指示信息可用于指示能否向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。该禁止定时器是过热相关的禁止定时器,该禁止定时器可用于控制终端设备向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息的频率。例如,如果过热配置信息包括第一指示信息和禁止定时器的定时时长,且第一指示信息指示能够向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,则终端设备可以向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,在发送过热相关的辅助信息时或者在发送过热相关的辅助信息后,终端设备开启该禁止定时器,同理,网络设备在接收该过热相关的辅助信息时或者在接收该过热相关的辅助信息后,也开启该禁止定时器。在该禁止定时器的运行时间内,终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,终端设备只能在该禁止定时器超时时或超时后再向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。例如,该禁止定时器的定时时长的取值范围可以是{s0,s0dot5,s1,s2,s5,s10,s20,s30,s60,s90,s120,s300,s600,spare3,spare2,spare1},关于该范围的相关介绍可参考前文。The overheating configuration information includes, for example, the first indication information, or includes the timing duration of the prohibition timer, or includes the first instruction information and the timing duration of the prohibition timer. Wherein, the first indication information may be used to indicate whether the auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device. The prohibition timer is a prohibition timer related to overheating, and the prohibition timer can be used to control the frequency of the terminal device sending auxiliary information related to the overheating to the network device. For example, if the overheating configuration information includes the first indication information and the timing duration of the prohibition timer, and the first indication information indicates that the auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device, the terminal device may send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device, When sending the auxiliary information related to overheating or after sending the auxiliary information related to overheating, the terminal device starts the prohibition timer. Similarly, the network device receives the auxiliary information related to overheating or after receiving the auxiliary information related to overheating. , Also turn on the prohibit timer. During the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device, and the terminal device can only send the auxiliary information related to the overheating to the network device when the prohibition timer expires or after the timeout. For example, the value range of the timer duration of the prohibition timer can be {s0,s0dot5,s1,s2,s5,s10,s20,s30,s60,s90,s120,s300,s600,spare3,spare2,spare1}, about For the related introduction of this range, please refer to the previous article.
S52、终端设备向第一网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,第一网络设备接收来自终端设备的过热相关的辅助信息。S52. The terminal device sends the auxiliary information related to overheating to the first network device, and the first network device receives the auxiliary information related to overheating from the terminal device.
如果过热配置信息包括第一指示信息,且第一指示信息用于指示能够向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,则终端设备如果出现过热问题,终端设备就可以向第一网络设备发 送过热相关的辅助信息。或者,如果过热配置信息包括第一指示信息和禁止定时器的定时时长,那么,如果终端设备出现过热问题,且该禁止定时器未处于运行状态,终端设备可以向第一网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。例如,终端设备可以将过热相关的辅助信息包括在UE辅助信息消息中发送给第一网络设备。If the overheating configuration information includes the first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device, if the terminal device has an overheating problem, the terminal device can send the overheating related information to the first network device. Supplementary information. Or, if the overheating configuration information includes the first indication information and the timing duration of the prohibition timer, then, if the terminal device has an overheating problem and the prohibition timer is not running, the terminal device can send overheating related information to the first network device. Supplementary information. For example, the terminal device may include the auxiliary information related to overheating in the UE auxiliary information message and send it to the first network device.
在本申请实施例中,过热相关的辅助信息可包括如下的一项或多项:终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量,终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量,终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽,终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽,终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数,终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数,或,终端设备的类型信息。例如,过热相关的辅助信息可包括终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量;或者,过热相关的辅助信息可包括终端设备支持的下行最大辅小区数量;或者,过热相关的辅助信息可包括终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽,以及终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;或者,过热相关的辅助信息可包括终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽,终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数,以及终端设备的类型信息;或者,过热相关的辅助信息可包括终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量,终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量,终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽,终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽,终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数,以及终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数,等等。In the embodiment of the present application, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include one or more of the following: the maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of uplink auxiliary cells supported by the terminal device, the maximum number of downlink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of downlink auxiliary carriers supported by the terminal device The number of secondary cells, the maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band, the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each frequency band supported, and the terminal device in each supported frequency band The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell, the maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell in each frequency band supported by the terminal device, or the type information of the terminal device. For example, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers supported by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum number of auxiliary cells in the downlink supported by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the terminal device's The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that each supported frequency band can support, and the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or, the auxiliary information related to overheating may include the maximum aggregate bandwidth supported by the terminal device in each frequency band supported. The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that can be supported by each frequency band, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of each frequency band supported by the terminal device, and the type information of the terminal device; or, auxiliary information related to overheating It can include the maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of uplink auxiliary cells supported by the terminal device, the maximum number of downlink auxiliary carriers or the maximum number of downlink auxiliary cells supported by the terminal device, and the maximum uplink aggregation that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band Bandwidth, the maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that each serving cell of each supported frequency band of the terminal device can support, and the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers supported by the terminal device in each frequency band supported. The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell on each supported frequency band, and so on.
需要注意的是,过热相关的辅助信息所指示的配置(可理解为,过热相关的辅助信息所包括的参数的取值),是终端设备期望的配置,而并不是终端设备的能力所实际能够支持的配置,例如,过热相关的辅助信息所指示的配置,可以低于或等于终端设备的能力所实际支持的配置。可以理解为,如果终端设备应用过热相关的辅助信息所指示的配置,就能改善终端设备的过热情况。例如,过热相关的辅助信息包括终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数,该MIMO层数例如为2,这表明终端设备期望第一网络设备将该终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数配置为2,但该终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所实际能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数,可能是4,即,终端设备期望减少该MIMO层数,以改善终端设备的过热情况。It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating (which can be understood as the value of the parameter included in the auxiliary information related to overheating) is the desired configuration of the terminal device, not the actual capability of the terminal device. The supported configuration, for example, the configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating, may be lower than or equal to the configuration actually supported by the capabilities of the terminal device. It can be understood that if the terminal device applies the configuration indicated by the auxiliary information related to overheating, the overheating of the terminal device can be improved. For example, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each serving cell on each supported frequency band. The number of MIMO layers is, for example, 2, which indicates that the terminal device expects the first network device Configure the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers supported by each serving cell of the terminal device in each supported frequency band to 2, but the terminal device can actually be able to support each serving cell in each supported frequency band. The maximum number of MIMO layers supported in the uplink may be 4, that is, the terminal device expects to reduce the number of MIMO layers to improve the overheating of the terminal device.
其中,这里所述的,终端设备支持的每个频段,例如包括高频(FR2)和低频(FR1)这两个频段,或者还可以按照更细的粒度划分更多频段。Among them, as described herein, each frequency band supported by the terminal device includes, for example, two frequency bands of high frequency (FR2) and low frequency (FR1), or more frequency bands may be divided according to a finer granularity.
S53、第一网络设备向终端设备发送RRC重配置消息,终端设备接收来自第一网络设备的RRC重配置消息。RRC重配置消息包括空口配置信息。因为此时还未涉及小区切换过程,因此该RRC重配置消息并不是图4所示的流程中S44中的RRC重配置消息。S53. The first network device sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the RRC reconfiguration message from the first network device. The RRC reconfiguration message includes air interface configuration information. Because the cell handover process has not been involved at this time, the RRC reconfiguration message is not the RRC reconfiguration message in S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4.
若第一网络设备接收了来自终端设备的过热相关的辅助信息,第一网络设备可以决策是否要降低该终端设备的空口配置,从而缓解该终端设备的过热问题。至于如何决策,取决于第一网络设备的内部实现。如果第一网络设备决定降低终端设备的空口配置,第一网络设备可以根据接收的过热相关的辅助信息确定空口配置信息,并将空口配置信息包括在 RRC重配置消息中发送给终端设备。终端设备接收该空口配置信息后,可以应用该空口配置信息,以降低终端设备的空口配置。例如,在降低空口配置之前,终端设备的能力为第二能力,在降低空口配置之后,终端设备的能力为第一能力,第一能力低于第二能力。第二能力例如为终端设备实际支持的最大能力,或者也可以低于终端设备实际支持的最大能力。终端设备使用降低的空口配置进行通信后,功率消耗降低,则终端设备的温度也会降低,从而解决了过热问题。或者,如果第一网络设备决定不降低终端设备的空口配置,第一网络设备就可以不必向终端设备发送空口配置信息,例如可以不必执行S53。If the first network device receives the auxiliary information related to overheating from the terminal device, the first network device can decide whether to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, thereby alleviating the overheating problem of the terminal device. As for how to make a decision, it depends on the internal implementation of the first network device. If the first network device decides to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, the first network device may determine the air interface configuration information according to the received auxiliary information related to overheating, and include the air interface configuration information in the RRC reconfiguration message and send it to the terminal device. After receiving the air interface configuration information, the terminal device can apply the air interface configuration information to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device. For example, before the air interface configuration is reduced, the capability of the terminal device is the second capability, and after the air interface configuration is reduced, the capability of the terminal device is the first capability, and the first capability is lower than the second capability. The second capability is, for example, the maximum capability actually supported by the terminal device, or may also be lower than the maximum capability actually supported by the terminal device. After the terminal device uses the reduced air interface configuration for communication, the power consumption is reduced, and the temperature of the terminal device is also reduced, thereby solving the problem of overheating. Alternatively, if the first network device decides not to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device, the first network device may not need to send the air interface configuration information to the terminal device, for example, it may not be necessary to perform S53.
其中,第一网络设备所配置的空口配置信息所包括的参数,与过热相关的辅助信息所包括的参数,可以是一致的。例如,过热相关的辅助信息包括终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数,则空口配置信息也包括终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数。在这种情况下,空口配置信息所包括的参数的取值,与过热相关的辅助信息所包括的该参数的取值,可以是相同的,或者也可以不同。例如,过热相关的辅助信息所包括的终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数为2,而终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所实际能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数为4。那么,空口配置信息所包括的终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数,可以是2,或者也可以是3。即,第一网络设备可以完全按照过热相关的辅助信息来确定空口配置信息,或者第一网络设备在确定空口配置信息时也可以考虑其他因素,这使得所确定的空口配置信息不完全等同于过热相关的辅助信息的建议。The parameters included in the air interface configuration information configured by the first network device and the parameters included in the auxiliary information related to overheating may be consistent. For example, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of the terminal device in each supported frequency band, and the air interface configuration information also includes the terminal device's maximum number of MIMO layers in each supported frequency band. The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that each serving cell can support. In this case, the value of the parameter included in the air interface configuration information and the value of the parameter included in the auxiliary information related to overheating may be the same or different. For example, the overheating-related auxiliary information includes the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of the terminal device in each supported frequency band is 2, and the terminal device has a maximum number of MIMO layers in each supported frequency band. The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that a serving cell can actually support is 4. Then, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell of the terminal device in each supported frequency band included in the air interface configuration information may be two or three. That is, the first network device can determine the air interface configuration information completely according to the auxiliary information related to overheating, or the first network device can also consider other factors when determining the air interface configuration information, which makes the determined air interface configuration information not completely equivalent to overheating Recommendations for related auxiliary information.
或者,第一网络设备所配置的空口配置信息所包括的参数,与过热相关的辅助信息所包括的参数,也可以不同。例如,过热相关的辅助信息包括终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数,而空口配置信息可以不包括该参数,而是包括终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量。可见,第一网络设备在确定空口配置信息时具有一定的灵活性。Alternatively, the parameters included in the air interface configuration information configured by the first network device and the parameters included in the auxiliary information related to overheating may also be different. For example, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each serving cell on each frequency band supported, and the air interface configuration information may not include this parameter, but includes the terminal device support Maximum number of uplink auxiliary carriers. It can be seen that the first network device has certain flexibility in determining the air interface configuration information.
其中,S52和S53都只是可选的步骤,不是必须执行的,在图5中用虚线表示。Among them, S52 and S53 are only optional steps, which are not necessary to be performed, and are represented by dashed lines in FIG. 5.
S54、在小区切换过程中,第一网络设备将第三配置信息发送给第二网络设备,第二网络设备接收来自第一网络设备的第三配置信息。例如,第一网络设备可以将第三配置信息包括在如图4所示的流程中的S41所述的切换准备信息消息中发送给第二网络设备,或者也可以将第三配置信息包括在其他消息中发送给第二网络设备。S54. During the cell handover process, the first network device sends the third configuration information to the second network device, and the second network device receives the third configuration information from the first network device. For example, the first network device may include the third configuration information in the handover preparation information message described in S41 in the process shown in FIG. 4 and send it to the second network device, or may also include the third configuration information in other The message is sent to the second network device.
第二网络设备接收第三配置信息后,可以根据第三配置信息确定第二配置信息,第二配置信息可用于终端设备在第二网络设备下的通信。例如,对于第三配置信息已包括的一些字段,第二网络设备可以重新配置这些字段的内容(例如,重新配置这些字段所包括的参数的取值),或者也可以不必重新配置,而是继续使用第三配置信息所包括的这些字段的内容。例如,对于对应的需求码为need M的字段,如果第二网络设备需要重新配置该字段的内容,则第二网络设备可以将该字段包括在第二配置信息中,从而终端设备接收第二配置信息后,就会应用第二配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置;而如果第二网络设备认为无需配置该字段的内容,则第二网络设备无需将该字段包括在第二配置信息中,终端设备接收第二配置信息后,发现第二配置信息不包括该字段,而第一配置信息包括该字段,终端设备就会继续应用第一配置信息包括的该字段对应的配置。对于对应其他需求码的字段,第二网络设备可按照相应的需求码的特性来进行配置,同样的,对于这些字段,第二 网络设备可以选择重新配置,或者可以继续沿用第三配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置。After receiving the third configuration information, the second network device may determine the second configuration information according to the third configuration information, and the second configuration information may be used for communication of the terminal device under the second network device. For example, for some fields already included in the third configuration information, the second network device may reconfigure the contents of these fields (for example, reconfigure the values of the parameters included in these fields), or may not need to reconfigure, but continue Use the contents of these fields included in the third configuration information. For example, for a field with a corresponding demand code of need M, if the second network device needs to reconfigure the content of the field, the second network device may include the field in the second configuration information, so that the terminal device receives the second configuration After the information, the configuration corresponding to the field included in the second configuration information will be applied; and if the second network device does not need to configure the content of the field, the second network device does not need to include the field in the second configuration information, After the terminal device receives the second configuration information and finds that the second configuration information does not include this field, but the first configuration information includes this field, the terminal device will continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information. For the fields corresponding to other demand codes, the second network device can be configured according to the characteristics of the corresponding demand codes. Similarly, for these fields, the second network device can choose to reconfigure or continue to use the third configuration information. The corresponding configuration of this field.
例如,第一网络设备的通信版本为版本1,第二网络设备的通信版本为版本2,例如版本1为v1540,版本2为v1520等。如果版本1高于版本2,那么对于第三配置信息所包括的一个或多个字段,如果有些字段对应于版本1,或者对应于版本1与版本2之间的其他版本,且不对应于版本2,也不对应于低于版本2的其他任意版本,则第二网络设备就无法识别这些字段,或者说无法解读这些字段。也就是说,一个网络设备无法识别高于该网络设备所支持的通信版本所对应的字段。对于第二网络设备无法识别的字段,第二网络设备不会将此类字段包括在第二配置信息中。For example, the communication version of the first network device is version 1, and the communication version of the second network device is version 2, for example, version 1 is v1540, version 2 is v1520, and so on. If version 1 is higher than version 2, then for one or more fields included in the third configuration information, if some fields correspond to version 1, or correspond to other versions between version 1 and version 2, and do not correspond to version 2. It does not correspond to any other versions lower than version 2, and the second network device cannot recognize these fields, or in other words, cannot interpret these fields. In other words, a network device cannot identify a field higher than the communication version supported by the network device. For fields that cannot be recognized by the second network device, the second network device does not include such fields in the second configuration information.
S55、第二网络设备将第二配置信息发送给终端设备,相应的,终端设备接收来自第二网络设备的第二配置信息。S55. The second network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second configuration information from the second network device.
例如,第二网络设备可以先将第二配置信息发送给第一网络设备,再由第一网络设备将第二配置信息发送给终端设备。例如第二网络设备可将第二配置信息包括在如图4所示的流程中的S43所述的切换控制消息中发送给第一网络设备,第一网络设备可将第二配置信息包括在如图4所示的流程中的S44所述的RRC重配置消息中发送给终端设备。在S51中介绍了,第一网络设备可以在进行小区切换之前将第三配置信息发送给终端设备,也可以在小区切换过程中通过RRC重配置消息将第三配置信息发送给终端设备。那么,如果第一网络设备通过RRC重配置消息将第三配置信息发送给终端设备,以及通过RRC重配置消息将第二配置信息发送给终端设备,则第三配置信息和第二配置信息是通过一条消息发送的。For example, the second network device may first send the second configuration information to the first network device, and then the first network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device. For example, the second network device may include the second configuration information in the handover control message described in S43 in the process shown in FIG. 4 and send it to the first network device, and the first network device may include the second configuration information as The RRC reconfiguration message described in S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4 is sent to the terminal device. It was introduced in S51 that the first network device can send the third configuration information to the terminal device before the cell handover, or can send the third configuration information to the terminal device through the RRC reconfiguration message during the cell handover. Then, if the first network device sends the third configuration information to the terminal device through the RRC reconfiguration message, and sends the second configuration information to the terminal device through the RRC reconfiguration message, the third configuration information and the second configuration information are passed through A message was sent.
S56、终端设备确定第一配置信息包括第一字段,且第二配置信息不包括第一字段。或者,对于有些字段来说,如果该字段包括的内容为空,与不包括该字段,效果是相同的,即,如果配置信息中包括该字段,但该字段的内容为空,也可视为配置信息不包括该字段。对于这样的字段来说,S56也可以是,终端设备确定第一配置信息包括第一字段,第二配置信息也包括第一字段,但第二配置信息包括的第一字段的内容为空。本申请实施例主要以终端设备确定第一配置信息包括第一字段且第二配置信息不包括第一字段为例。S56. The terminal device determines that the first configuration information includes the first field, and the second configuration information does not include the first field. Or, for some fields, if the content of the field is empty, the effect is the same as if the field is not included. That is, if the field is included in the configuration information, but the content of the field is empty, it can also be regarded as The configuration information does not include this field. For such a field, S56 may also be that the terminal device determines that the first configuration information includes the first field and the second configuration information also includes the first field, but the content of the first field included in the second configuration information is empty. The embodiment of the present application mainly takes as an example the terminal device determining that the first configuration information includes the first field and the second configuration information does not include the first field.
其中,第一字段为需要继承的字段,对此可理解为,当终端设备未接收第一字段时,终端设备需要继承上次接收的第一字段的内容,或者说,终端设备需要继续应用上次接收的第一字段对应的配置。或者理解为第一字段为当终端设备新接收的配置信息(例如,第二配置信息)不包括第一字段时,终端设备需要保持上次接收的第一字段的内容的字段。例如,第一字段对应的需求码为need M。Among them, the first field is a field that needs to be inherited. This can be understood as when the terminal device does not receive the first field, the terminal device needs to inherit the content of the first field received last time, or in other words, the terminal device needs to continue to apply The configuration corresponding to the first field received this time. Or it is understood that the first field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the first field received last time when the configuration information newly received by the terminal device (for example, the second configuration information) does not include the first field. For example, the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M.
因为第二配置信息是基于第一配置信息进行的进一步的配置,因此终端设备在接收第二配置信息后,可将第二配置信息与第一配置信息进行比较,以确定实际应该应用的配置信息。例如,如果第二网络设备无法识别第一网络设备所包括的部分字段,则第二配置信息就不会包括这部分字段。而这些字段中可能有需要继承的字段(例如第一字段),由于第二配置信息不包括此类字段,则终端设备会继续应用第一配置信息所包括的此类字段对应的配置。而此类字段对应的配置是第二网络设备无法支持的,如果终端设备继续应用第一配置信息所包括的此类字段对应的配置,就可能会导致终端设备在第二网络设备下的通信出现问题,例如终端设备可能无法与第二网络设备进行正常的数据通信。因此在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以确定第一配置信息包括而第二配置信息不包括的字段,例如终端设备可以确定一个或多个这样的字段,这一个或多个字段中可以包括第一字段。其中,对 于同一个字段来说,会具有相同的标识,则终端设备根据字段的标识就能确定配置信息中是否包括相应的字段。Because the second configuration information is a further configuration based on the first configuration information, after receiving the second configuration information, the terminal device can compare the second configuration information with the first configuration information to determine the configuration information that should actually be applied . For example, if the second network device cannot identify some of the fields included in the first network device, the second configuration information will not include this portion of the fields. And these fields may have fields that need to be inherited (for example, the first field). Since the second configuration information does not include such fields, the terminal device will continue to apply the configuration corresponding to such fields included in the first configuration information. The configuration corresponding to this type of field is not supported by the second network device. If the terminal device continues to use the configuration corresponding to this type of field included in the first configuration information, it may cause the terminal device to communicate under the second network device. The problem, for example, the terminal device may not be able to perform normal data communication with the second network device. Therefore, in this embodiment of the application, the terminal device may determine that the first configuration information includes fields that are not included in the second configuration information. For example, the terminal device may determine one or more such fields, and the one or more fields may include the first configuration information. One field. Among them, for the same field, it will have the same identifier, and the terminal device can determine whether the configuration information includes the corresponding field according to the identifier of the field.
S57、终端设备释放第一配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置,或者说,释放第一配置信息所包括的第一字段的内容。S57. The terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information, or in other words, releases the content of the first field included in the first configuration information.
对于第一配置信息包括而第二配置信息不包括的一个或多个字段中的每个字段,终端设备可以确定该字段对应的需求码,如果该字段对应的需求码指示该字段为不需要继承的字段,例如该字段的需求码为need N,则终端设备可不采取相应行为;或者,该字段的需求码为need R,则终端设备可释放该字段对应的配置。或者,如果该字段对应的需求码指示该字段为需要继承的字段,例如第一字段就是需要继承的字段,例如第一字段对应的需求码为need M,则对于这样的字段,终端设备可以释放第一配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置,即,终端设备不会继续应用第一配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置。在这种方式中,终端设备无需判断字段所对应的通信版本,只要一个字段包括在第一配置信息中且不包括在第二配置信息中,且该字段为需要继承的字段,终端设备就可以释放第一配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置,从而终端设备不再应用第一配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置,可以理解为,终端设备释放该字段对应的配置。For each field in one or more fields that are included in the first configuration information but not included in the second configuration information, the terminal device can determine the demand code corresponding to the field, and if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field does not need to be inherited For example, if the demand code of this field is need N, the terminal device may not take corresponding actions; or, if the demand code of this field is need R, the terminal device may release the configuration corresponding to this field. Or, if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field is a field that needs to be inherited, for example, the first field is a field that needs to be inherited, for example, the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M, then the terminal device can release such a field The configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information, that is, the terminal device will not continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information. In this way, the terminal device does not need to determine the communication version corresponding to the field, as long as a field is included in the first configuration information and not included in the second configuration information, and the field is a field that needs to be inherited, the terminal device can The configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information is released, so that the terminal device no longer applies the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information. It can be understood that the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the field.
例如,第一字段包括过热配置信息,第一字段对应的需求码为need M。第一字段包括在第一配置信息中,但并未包括在第二配置信息中。那么终端设备可以释放第一配置信息所包括的第一字段的内容,从而终端设备不再应用第一配置信息所包括的第一字段包括的过热配置信息。For example, the first field includes overheating configuration information, and the demand code corresponding to the first field is needM. The first field is included in the first configuration information, but is not included in the second configuration information. Then the terminal device can release the content of the first field included in the first configuration information, so that the terminal device no longer applies the overheating configuration information included in the first field included in the first configuration information.
第二配置信息未包括的字段,很可能是第二网络设备无法识别的字段。如果终端设备继承了第一配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置,很可能导致终端设备在第二网络设备下无法正常通信。因此在本申请实施例中,终端设备不会继承第一配置信息所包括的该字段对应的配置,使得终端设备的实际配置与第二网络设备所理解的终端设备的配置对应一致,保证终端设备在第二网络设备下能够正常进行数据通信。The fields not included in the second configuration information are likely to be fields that the second network device cannot recognize. If the terminal device inherits the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information, it is likely that the terminal device cannot communicate normally under the second network device. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device does not inherit the configuration corresponding to the field included in the first configuration information, so that the actual configuration of the terminal device corresponds to the configuration of the terminal device understood by the second network device, ensuring that the terminal device Data communication can be carried out normally under the second network device.
或者,在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以确定字段对应的通信版本(例如,字段中可以包括版本号,从而终端设备可以确定一个字段所对应的通信版本),再进行相应处理。例如,对于第一配置信息包括而第二配置信息不包括的一个或多个字段中的每个字段,终端设备可以确定该字段对应的需求码,如果该字段对应的需求码指示该字段为不需要继承的字段,例如该字段的需求码为need N,则终端设备可不采取相应行为;或者,该字段的需求码为need R,则终端设备可释放该字段对应的配置。或者,如果该字段对应的需求码指示该字段为需要继承的字段,例如第一字段就是需要继承的字段,例如第一字段对应的需求码为need M,第一字段对应的通信版本为第一版本,则对于第一字段,则终端设备可以进一步确定,第二网络设备是否能够支持第一版本。例如,终端设备确定第二网络设备是否能够支持第一版本的方式可以包括:确定第二配置信息是否包括第一版本所对应的其他字段(例如,终端设备可以确定第二信息所包括的除第一字段外的其他的一个或多个字段所对应的通信版本,以确定这些字段中是否有对应于第一版本的字段,如果有,则确定第二配置信息包括第一版本所对应的其他字段,如果没有,则确定第二配置信息不包括第一版本所对应的其他字段),或者,确定第二配置信息是否包括高于第一版本的任意版本所对应的其他字段(确定方式类似于确定第二配置信息是否包括第一版本所对应的其他字段的方式),或者,确定第二配置信息是否包括第一版本所对应的其他字段,以及确定第 二配置信息是否包括高于第一版本的任意版本所对应的其他字段。Alternatively, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also determine the communication version corresponding to the field (for example, the field may include a version number, so that the terminal device may determine the communication version corresponding to a field), and then perform corresponding processing. For example, for each field in one or more fields that are included in the first configuration information but not included in the second configuration information, the terminal device may determine the demand code corresponding to the field, and if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field is not Fields that need to be inherited, for example, if the demand code of this field is need N, the terminal device may not take corresponding actions; or, if the demand code of this field is need R, the terminal device may release the configuration corresponding to this field. Or, if the demand code corresponding to the field indicates that the field is a field that needs to be inherited, for example, the first field is the field that needs to be inherited, for example, the demand code corresponding to the first field is need M, and the communication version corresponding to the first field is first Version, for the first field, the terminal device can further determine whether the second network device can support the first version. For example, the method for the terminal device to determine whether the second network device can support the first version may include: determining whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to the first version (for example, the terminal device may determine that the second information includes other than the first version). The communication version corresponding to one or more fields other than one field, to determine whether there is a field corresponding to the first version in these fields, and if there is, it is determined that the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to the first version If not, determine whether the second configuration information does not include other fields corresponding to the first version), or determine whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to any version higher than the first version (the determination method is similar to determining Whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to the first version), or determine whether the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to the first version, and determine whether the second configuration information includes a version higher than the first version Other fields corresponding to any version.
如果第二配置信息包括第一版本所对应的其他字段,或者包括高于第一版本的任意版本所对应的其他字段,或者包括第一版本所对应的其他字段以及包括高于第一版本的任意版本所对应的其他字段,那么终端设备可以确定第二网络设备能够支持第一字段所对应的第一版本,之所以第二配置信息不包括第一字段,可能是第二网络设备认为终端设备需要继续应用第一配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置。因此在这种情况下,终端设备无需释放第一配置信息所包括的第一字段的内容,而是可以继续应用第一配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置。通过对于版本的确定,终端设备可以尽量不释放第二网络设备能够支持的字段包括的内容,使得终端设备与第二网络设备的配置保持一致,保证终端设备在第二网络设备下能够进行正常的数据通信。If the second configuration information includes other fields corresponding to the first version, or includes other fields corresponding to any version higher than the first version, or includes other fields corresponding to the first version and includes any other fields higher than the first version Version corresponding to other fields, then the terminal device can determine that the second network device can support the first version corresponding to the first field. The reason why the second configuration information does not include the first field may be that the second network device thinks that the terminal device needs Continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information. Therefore, in this case, the terminal device does not need to release the content of the first field included in the first configuration information, but can continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information. By determining the version, the terminal device can try not to release the content included in the fields that the second network device can support, so that the configuration of the terminal device and the second network device are consistent, and ensure that the terminal device can perform normally under the second network device. data communication.
或者,如果第二配置信息既不包括第一版本所对应的其他字段,也不包括高于第一版本的任意版本所对应的其他字段,那么终端设备无法确定第二网络设备是否支持第一字段所对应的第一版本,但如果第二网络设备实际不支持第一版本,如果终端设备继续应用第一配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置,就可能会导致终端设备在第二网络设备下的通信出现问题,例如终端设备可能无法与第二网络设备进行正常的数据通信。因此在这种情况下,终端设备可以释放第一字段第一配置信息所包括的第一字段的内容,不再继续应用第一配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置。通过这种方式,使得终端设备与第二网络设备的配置保持一致,保证终端设备在第二网络设备下能够进行正常的数据通信。Or, if the second configuration information neither includes other fields corresponding to the first version, nor any other fields corresponding to any version higher than the first version, the terminal device cannot determine whether the second network device supports the first field Corresponding to the first version, but if the second network device does not actually support the first version, if the terminal device continues to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information, it may cause the terminal device to be on the second network device There is a problem with the communication under the network, for example, the terminal device may not be able to perform normal data communication with the second network device. Therefore, in this case, the terminal device may release the content of the first field included in the first configuration information of the first field, and no longer continue to apply the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information. In this way, the configuration of the terminal device and the second network device are kept consistent, and it is ensured that the terminal device can perform normal data communication under the second network device.
例如,若终端设备在第一网络设备下的第一配置信息包括了过热配置信息(例如其他配置(OtherConfig)-v1540或过热辅助配置(overheatingAssistanceConfig)等),例如该过热配置信息包括在第一字段中,第一字段例如为一个IE。如果终端设备接收的第二配置信息不包含第一字段,则终端设备可以确定第二配置信息是否包括对应于v1540版本或对应于高于v1540版本的其他任意版本的字段。如果第二配置信息包括了对应于v1540版本的字段,或包括了对应于高于v1540版本的其他任意版本的字段,则表示第二网络设备能够支持v1540版本,或能够支持高于v1540版本的其他版本,则第二网络设备也就能够支持第一字段,此时终端设备不必释放第一配置信息所包括的第一字段的内容,即,不释放该过热配置信息,而是可以继续应用第一配置信息所包括的该过热配置信息。或者,如果第二配置信息既不包括对应于v1540版本的字段,也不包括对应于高于v1540版本的其他任意版本的字段,则终端设备无法确定第二网络设备的通信版本,也无法确定第二网络设备是否能够支持第一字段所对应的通信版本。在这种情况下,为了保险起见,终端设备可以释放第一配置信息所包括的该过热配置信息,不再应用该过热配置信息。For example, if the first configuration information of the terminal device under the first network device includes overheating configuration information (such as other configuration (OtherConfig)-v1540 or overheating assistant configuration (overheatingAssistanceConfig), etc.), for example, the overheating configuration information is included in the first field In, the first field is, for example, an IE. If the second configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the first field, the terminal device may determine whether the second configuration information includes a field corresponding to the v1540 version or corresponding to any other version higher than the v1540 version. If the second configuration information includes a field corresponding to the v1540 version, or includes a field corresponding to any other version higher than v1540, it means that the second network device can support the v1540 version, or can support other versions higher than v1540 Version, the second network device can also support the first field. At this time, the terminal device does not have to release the content of the first field included in the first configuration information, that is, the overheating configuration information is not released, but can continue to apply the first field. The overheating configuration information included in the configuration information. Or, if the second configuration information neither includes a field corresponding to the v1540 version nor any other version higher than v1540, the terminal device cannot determine the communication version of the second network device, nor can it determine the first 2. Whether the network device can support the communication version corresponding to the first field. In this case, for the sake of safety, the terminal device may release the overheating configuration information included in the first configuration information, and no longer apply the overheating configuration information.
S58、终端设备将终端设备的能力由第一能力调整为第二能力。其中,第一能力低于第二能力。S58. The terminal device adjusts the capability of the terminal device from the first capability to the second capability. Among them, the first ability is lower than the second ability.
如果执行了S53,且终端设备调整了终端设备的能力,则可以执行S58,或者,如果终端设备并未调整终端设备的能力,则无需执行S58。因此,S58是可选的步骤,在图5中用虚线表示。在S53中,终端设备接收该空口配置信息后,可以应用该空口配置信息,以降低终端设备的空口配置。例如,在降低空口配置之前,终端设备的能力为第二能力,在降低空口配置之后,终端设备的能力为第一能力,第一能力低于第二能力。例如,空口配置信息包括终端设备的天线个数,在降低空口配置之前,终端设备的天线个数为4,则第二能力为4天线能力,而在降低空口配置后,终端设备的天线个数变为2,则第一能力 为2天线能力,可见,第一能力低于第二能力。第一能力可以认为是第一网络设备为适配第一字段的内容而配置的,或者说,是第一网络设备为适配根据第一字段所接收的过热相关的辅助信息而配置的。第二能力可以是终端设备支持的最大能力,例如终端设备在入网时通过UE能力信息消息上报给网络的最大能力,或者,第二能力也可以是低于终端设备支持的最大能力且高于第一能力的任意能力。终端设备使用降低的空口配置进行通信后,功率消耗降低,则终端设备的温度也会降低,从而解决了过热问题。If S53 is executed and the terminal device adjusts the capability of the terminal device, S58 may be executed, or if the terminal device does not adjust the capability of the terminal device, S58 does not need to be executed. Therefore, S58 is an optional step, which is represented by a dashed line in FIG. 5. In S53, after receiving the air interface configuration information, the terminal device can apply the air interface configuration information to reduce the air interface configuration of the terminal device. For example, before the air interface configuration is reduced, the capability of the terminal device is the second capability, and after the air interface configuration is reduced, the capability of the terminal device is the first capability, and the first capability is lower than the second capability. For example, the air interface configuration information includes the number of antennas of the terminal device. Before the air interface configuration is reduced, the number of antennas of the terminal device is 4, and the second capability is the 4-antenna capability. After the air interface configuration is reduced, the number of antennas of the terminal device If it becomes 2, the first capability is the 2-antenna capability. It can be seen that the first capability is lower than the second capability. The first capability may be considered as configured by the first network device to adapt to the content of the first field, or in other words, configured by the first network device to adapt the auxiliary information related to overheating received according to the first field. The second capability may be the maximum capability supported by the terminal device, for example, the maximum capability that the terminal device reports to the network through the UE capability information message when it enters the network, or the second capability may also be lower than the maximum capability supported by the terminal device and higher than the maximum capability supported by the terminal device. Any ability of an ability. After the terminal device uses the reduced air interface configuration for communication, the power consumption is reduced, and the temperature of the terminal device is also reduced, thereby solving the problem of overheating.
而终端设备要切换到第二网络设备,第二网络设备可能并不支持第一字段所对应的通信版本,即,目标网络设备无法识别第一字段,那么第二网络设备自然也无法获知终端设备根据第一字段调整了能力。因此,终端设备可以将终端设备的能力再调整回第二能力,使得第二网络设备能够按照第二能力调度终端设备,减小因为第二网络设备所理解的终端设备的能力与终端设备实际应用的能力不一致而导致的调度出错的概率。例如,第一能力对应的终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数为2,而第二能力对应的终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数为4,则终端设备可将终端设备在所支持的每个频段上的每个服务小区所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数由2调整为4。If the terminal device needs to switch to the second network device, the second network device may not support the communication version corresponding to the first field, that is, the target network device cannot recognize the first field, so the second network device naturally cannot learn about the terminal device. The ability is adjusted according to the first field. Therefore, the terminal device can adjust the capability of the terminal device back to the second capability, so that the second network device can schedule the terminal device according to the second capability, reducing the ability of the terminal device and the actual application of the terminal device as understood by the second network device. The probability of scheduling errors caused by inconsistent capabilities. For example, the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that a terminal device corresponding to the first capability can support in each serving cell in each supported frequency band is 2, while the terminal device corresponding to the second capability is in each supported frequency band. The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell is 4, and the terminal device can adjust the maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that can be supported by each serving cell on each frequency band supported by the terminal device from 2 to 4.
另外,本申请实施例中,第二网络设备所应用的配置方式是继承制的配置方式,或者说是迭代式的配置方式,即,需要基于前一次的配置来进行后一次的配置,例如基于第一网络设备的第三配置信息来确定第二配置信息,也就是说,第二配置信息不是采用全配置的方式配置的。而在实际应用中,第二网络设备还可以采用全配置(full configuration)的方式,全配置方式为将待配置给终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。例如,如果第二网络设备采用全配置的方式,那么第二网络设备在接收来自第三网络设备的第三配置信息后,如果确定第三配置信息包括了第二网络设备无法识别的字段,则第二网络设备会清理(例如,丢弃)第一网络设备为终端设备配置的所有参数(或者说,所有字段),而将需要为终端设备配置的字段全部重新配置,在这种情况下,第二配置信息就是第二网络设备为终端设备所配置的全新的配置信息,与第三配置信息无关。这种方式也能保证终端设备和第二网络设备对于配置信息的理解一致,使得终端设备在第二网络设备下能够正常通信。但这种方式,由于需要全部重新配置,因此第二配置信息所包括的信息量可能较大,由此带来的传输开销也会比较大。本申请实施例并不限制第二网络设备所采用的配置方式,但是,如果第二网络设备采用了全配置的方式,则对于终端设备来说,就无需执行释放需要继承的字段的行为。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the configuration mode applied by the second network device is the configuration mode of inheritance system, or iterative configuration mode, that is, the configuration mode of the next time needs to be performed based on the previous configuration, for example, based on The third configuration information of the first network device determines the second configuration information, that is, the second configuration information is not configured in a full configuration manner. In practical applications, the second network device may also adopt a full configuration method, which is a method in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured. For example, if the second network device adopts the full configuration method, after the second network device receives the third configuration information from the third network device, if it is determined that the third configuration information includes a field that the second network device cannot recognize, then The second network device will clean up (for example, discard) all the parameters (or all fields) configured by the first network device for the terminal device, and reconfigure all the fields that need to be configured for the terminal device. In this case, the first The second configuration information is brand new configuration information configured by the second network device for the terminal device, and has nothing to do with the third configuration information. This method can also ensure that the terminal device and the second network device have the same understanding of the configuration information, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device. However, in this way, since it needs to be completely reconfigured, the amount of information included in the second configuration information may be relatively large, and the transmission overhead caused by this may also be relatively large. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the configuration mode adopted by the second network device. However, if the second network device adopts the full configuration mode, for the terminal device, there is no need to perform the behavior of releasing the fields that need to be inherited.
因此,作为一种可选的实施方式,第二网络设备可以向第一网络设备发送配置指示信息,第一网络设备可接收来自第二网络设备的配置指示信息。该配置指示信息可指示第二网络设备使用全配置方式配置终端设备,或者指示第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置终端设备。例如,该配置指示信息可以在小区切换之前发送给第一网络设备,例如,在第一网络设备向网络设备发送切换准备信息消息(如图4所示的流程中的S41)之前,第二网络设备可以向第一网络设备发送配置指示信息,或者,第二网络设备可以在将第二配置信息发送给终端设备之前,向第一网络设备发送配置指示信息,或者,第二网络设备也可以将配置指示信息与第二配置信息一并发送。第一网络设备接收配置指示信息后,可以将配置指示信息发送给终端设备,从而终端设备能够接收该配置指示信息。例如,第一网络设备可将配置指示信息包括在RRC重配置消息(如图4所示的流程中的S44)中发送给终端 设备。如果配置指示信息指示第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置终端设备,则可以继续执行本申请实施例提供的技术方案;而如果配置指示信息指示第二网络设备使用全配置方式配置终端设备,则可以不必执行本申请实施例提供的技术方案。例如,如果配置指示信息指示第二网络设备使用全配置方式配置终端设备,则终端设备接收第二配置信息后,可应用第二配置信息所包括的全部配置或部分配置,对于之前获得的来自第一网络设备的配置信息(例如第一配置信息),终端设备可以丢弃。Therefore, as an optional implementation manner, the second network device may send configuration instruction information to the first network device, and the first network device may receive configuration instruction information from the second network device. The configuration instruction information may indicate that the second network device uses the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, or indicates that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device. For example, the configuration instruction information may be sent to the first network device before the cell handover. For example, before the first network device sends a handover preparation information message (S41 in the process shown in FIG. 4) to the network device, the second network The device may send the configuration instruction information to the first network device, or the second network device may send the configuration instruction information to the first network device before sending the second configuration information to the terminal device, or the second network device may also send the configuration instruction information to the first network device. The configuration instruction information is sent together with the second configuration information. After receiving the configuration instruction information, the first network device may send the configuration instruction information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can receive the configuration instruction information. For example, the first network device may include the configuration indication information in the RRC reconfiguration message (S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4) and send it to the terminal device. If the configuration instruction information indicates that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, you can continue to implement the technical solution provided in the embodiment of this application; and if the configuration instruction information indicates that the second network device uses the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, then It is not necessary to implement the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application. For example, if the configuration instruction information instructs the second network device to configure the terminal device in the full configuration mode, after receiving the second configuration information, the terminal device can apply all or part of the configuration included in the second configuration information. The configuration information of a network device (for example, the first configuration information) can be discarded by the terminal device.
另外,本申请实施例还可继续执行小区切换过程,例如,第一网络设备是通过切换命令将第二配置信息发送给终端设备,则终端设备接下来可继续执行如图4所示的流程中的S45等步骤。In addition, the embodiment of the present application can continue to perform the cell handover process. For example, if the first network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device through a handover command, the terminal device can continue to perform the process shown in FIG. 4 S45 and other steps.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备如果确定来自第一网络设备的第一配置信息包括第一字段,且来自目标网络设备的第一配置信息不包括第一字段,则终端设备就可以释放第一配置信息所包括的第一字段对应的配置,即,终端设备不再应用之前接收的第一字段所对应的配置。第二网络设备未向终端设备发送第一字段,很可能是因为第二网络设备无法识别第一字段,因此终端设备释放第一字段所对应的配置,可以使得终端设备和第二网络设备应用的字段保持一致,使得终端设备在第二网络设备下能够正常通信。In this embodiment of the application, if the terminal device determines that the first configuration information from the first network device includes the first field, and the first configuration information from the target network device does not include the first field, the terminal device can release the first field. The configuration corresponding to the first field included in the configuration information, that is, the terminal device no longer applies the previously received configuration corresponding to the first field. The second network device did not send the first field to the terminal device. It is probably because the second network device cannot recognize the first field. Therefore, the terminal device releases the configuration corresponding to the first field, which can make the terminal device and the second network device apply The fields are kept consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
为了解决相同的技术问题,本申请实施例提供第二种配置终端设备的方法,请参见图6,为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中,以该方法应用于图3所示的网络架构为例。In order to solve the same technical problem, an embodiment of the present application provides a second method for configuring a terminal device. Please refer to FIG. 6, which is a flowchart of this method. In the following introduction process, the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 3 is taken as an example.
为了便于介绍,在下文中,以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例。下文所述的第一网络设备为终端设备的源网络设备,即,终端设备在进行小区切换前所接入的网络设备,下文所述的第二网络设备为终端设备的目标网络设备,即,终端设备在进行小区切换后所接入的网络设备。则下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3所示的网络架构中的终端设备,下文中所述的第一网络设备可以是图3所示的网络架构中的源基站,下文中所述的第二网络设备可以是图3所示的网络架构中的目标基站。For ease of introduction, in the following, the method executed by the network device and the terminal device is taken as an example. The first network device described below is the source network device of the terminal device, that is, the network device that the terminal device accesses before cell handover, and the second network device described below is the target network device of the terminal device, that is, The network equipment that the terminal equipment accesses after the cell handover. Then the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3, and the first network device described below may be the source base station in the network architecture shown in FIG. The second network device may be the target base station in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3.
S61、第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送版本指示信息,第一网络设备接收来自第二网络设备的版本指示信息。版本指示信息可以指示第二网络设备的通信版本,例如第二网络设备的通信版本为第二版本。S61. The second network device sends version indication information to the first network device, and the first network device receives the version indication information from the second network device. The version indication information may indicate the communication version of the second network device, for example, the communication version of the second network device is the second version.
例如,在进行小区切换之前就可执行S61。例如在第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送切换准备信息消息(如图4所示的流程中的S41)之前,第二网络设备可以向第一网络设备发送版本指示信息。For example, S61 can be performed before the cell handover is performed. For example, before the first network device sends the handover preparation information message (S41 in the process shown in FIG. 4) to the second network device, the second network device may send version indication information to the first network device.
S62、第一网络设备确定第二版本低于第一版本。第一版本是第一网络设备的通信版本。例如,第一版本为v1540,第二版本为v1520,或者,第一版本为v1540,第二版本为v1530,等等。S62. The first network device determines that the second version is lower than the first version. The first version is the communication version of the first network device. For example, the first version is v1540, the second version is v1520, or the first version is v1540, the second version is v1530, and so on.
S63、第一网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息,终端设备接收来自第一网络设备的第一信息。第一信息可用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置。第一字段是需要继承的字段,例如,第一字段为当终端设备新接收的配置信息不包括第一字段时,终端设备需要保持上次接收的第一字段的内容的字段,例如第一字段对应的需求码为need M。关于第一字段的更多解释,可参考图5所示的实施例的相关描述。S63. The first network device sends the first information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the first information from the first network device. The first information may be used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field. The first field is a field that needs to be inherited. For example, the first field is a field that the terminal device needs to keep the content of the first field received last time when the configuration information newly received by the terminal device does not include the first field, for example, the first field The corresponding demand code is need M. For more explanation of the first field, reference may be made to the related description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
S63也可以发生在小区切换之前,例如,在第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送切换准备信息消息(如图4所示的流程中的S41)之前,第一网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息。S63 may also occur before the cell handover. For example, before the first network device sends the handover preparation information message to the second network device (S41 in the process shown in FIG. 4), the first network device sends the first network device to the terminal device. information.
一个网络设备无法识别高于该网络设备的通信版本的其他通信版本所对应的字段。在 进行小区切换之前,终端设备工作在第一网络设备下,第一网络设备会向终端设备发送相应的配置信息,例如第一网络设备向终端设备发送了配置信息1,终端设备根据配置信息1可得到配置信息2,并根据配置信息2进行配置,从而与第一网络设备能够正常通信。关于终端设备根据配置信息1得到配置信息2的过程,可参考图5所示的实施例的相关介绍(其中,可将图5所示的实施例的相关介绍中的“第一配置信息”这一名称替换为这里的“配置信息2”,以及将图5所示的实施例的相关介绍中的“第三配置信息”这一名称替换为这里的“配置信息1”)。A network device cannot identify fields corresponding to other communication versions that are higher than the communication version of the network device. Before cell handover, the terminal device works under the first network device, and the first network device sends corresponding configuration information to the terminal device. For example, the first network device sends configuration information 1 to the terminal device, and the terminal device according to the configuration information 1 The configuration information 2 can be obtained, and configuration can be performed according to the configuration information 2, so that it can communicate with the first network device normally. Regarding the process for the terminal device to obtain the configuration information 2 according to the configuration information 1, refer to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 (wherein, the "first configuration information" in the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. One name is replaced with "configuration information 2" here, and the name "third configuration information" in the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 is replaced with "configuration information 1" here).
在小区切换过程中,第一网络设备也会将配置信息1发送给第二网络设备,第二网络设备可以根据配置信息1来确定第二网络设备给终端设备的配置,例如称为配置信息3。但第一网络设备的通信版本高于第二网络设备的通信版本,因此,配置信息1所包括的对应于第一版本的字段,以及对应于第一版本和第二版本之间的其他版本的字段,第二网络设备都无法识别。对于无法识别的字段,第二网络设备所确定的配置信息3中就不会包括这部分字段。而这些字段中可能有需要继承的字段(例如第一字段),由于来自第二网络设备的配置信息3不包括此类字段,则终端设备会继续应用来自第一网络设备的配置信息(例如配置信息2)所包括的此类字段对应的配置。而此类字段对应的配置是第二网络设备无法支持的,如果终端设备继续配置信息2所包括的此类字段对应的配置,就可能会导致终端设备在第二网络设备下的通信出现问题,例如终端设备可能无法与第二网络设备进行正常的数据通信。During the cell handover process, the first network device will also send configuration information 1 to the second network device, and the second network device can determine the configuration of the second network device to the terminal device according to the configuration information 1, for example, called configuration information 3. . However, the communication version of the first network device is higher than the communication version of the second network device. Therefore, the configuration information 1 includes the fields corresponding to the first version, and the fields corresponding to the other versions between the first version and the second version. Field, the second network device cannot recognize it. For unrecognized fields, the configuration information 3 determined by the second network device will not include this part of the fields. And these fields may have fields that need to be inherited (such as the first field). Since the configuration information 3 from the second network device does not include such fields, the terminal device will continue to apply the configuration information from the first network device (such as the configuration Information 2) The configuration corresponding to such fields included. The configuration corresponding to this type of field is not supported by the second network device. If the terminal device continues the configuration corresponding to this type of field included in the configuration information 2, it may cause communication problems for the terminal device under the second network device. For example, the terminal device may not be able to perform normal data communication with the second network device.
为此,在本申请实施例中,如果第一网络设备确定第二版本低于第一版本,那么第一网络设备就可以通过向终端设备发送第一信息的方式,指示终端设备释放全部或部分需要继承的字段所对应的配置(或者说,释放全部或部分需要继承的字段所包括的内容)。这全部或部分需要继承的字段,可以是包括在配置信息2中的字段,即,第一网络设备可以指示终端设备释放配置信息2所包括的全部或部分需要继承的字段对应的配置。例如第一字段是这全部或部分需要继承的字段中的一个,例如,第一字段包括过热配置信息,过热配置信息可包括第二指示信息,或包括禁止定时器的定时时长,或包括第二指示信息和禁止定时器的定时时长。其中,第二指示信息可用于指示能否向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息,在禁止定时器的运行时间内,终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。关于过热配置信息以及过热相关的辅助信息的介绍,可参考图5所示的实施例。其中,图5所示的实施例中的“第一指示信息”,相当于这里的“第二指示信息”。For this reason, in this embodiment of the application, if the first network device determines that the second version is lower than the first version, then the first network device can instruct the terminal device to release all or part of it by sending the first information to the terminal device. The configuration corresponding to the field that needs to be inherited (in other words, release all or part of the content included in the field that needs to be inherited). All or part of the fields that need to be inherited may be the fields included in the configuration information 2. That is, the first network device may instruct the terminal device to release the configuration corresponding to all or part of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information 2. For example, the first field is one of all or part of the fields that need to be inherited. For example, the first field includes overheating configuration information. The overheating configuration information may include second indication information, or include the timing duration of the prohibit timer, or include the second Indication information and the timing duration of the prohibition timer. The second indication information can be used to indicate whether the auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device. During the running time of the prohibit timer, the terminal device cannot send the auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device. For the introduction of overheating configuration information and auxiliary information related to overheating, refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5. Among them, the "first indication information" in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 is equivalent to the "second indication information" here.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述的全部或部分需要继承的字段,可以包括对应于第一版本的字段,包括对应于第一版本和第二版本之间的其他版本的字段,也可以包括对应于第二版本的字段,还可以包括对应于低于第二版本的其他版本的字段。例如,第二版本为v1520,第一版本为v1540,则第一指示信息可以指示终端设备释放对应于v1540的需要继承的字段、释放对应于v1530的需要继承的字段、释放对应于v1520的需要继承的字段、以及释放对应于v1510的需要继承的字段。即,在这种方式下,第一网络设备并未确定字段对应的版本,也无需确定第二网络设备的具体版本,只要第二版本低于第一版本,那么,只要是配置信息2所包括的需要继承的字段,无论第二网络设备是否支持,第一网络设备也都可以指示终端设备予以释放。这样,终端设备对于这些字段不会再继承,从而使得终端设备和第二网络设备对于字段的理解保持一致,使得终端设备在第二网络设备下能够正常通信。As an optional implementation manner, all or part of the fields that need to be inherited may include fields corresponding to the first version, including fields corresponding to other versions between the first version and the second version, or It includes fields corresponding to the second version, and may also include fields corresponding to other versions lower than the second version. For example, if the second version is v1520 and the first version is v1540, the first indication information can instruct the terminal device to release the fields that need to be inherited corresponding to v1540, release the fields that need to be inherited corresponding to v1530, and release the need to inherit fields corresponding to v1520. And release the fields corresponding to v1510 that need to be inherited. That is, in this way, the first network device does not determine the version corresponding to the field, nor does it need to determine the specific version of the second network device. As long as the second version is lower than the first version, then as long as the configuration information 2 includes Regardless of whether the second network device supports the fields that need to be inherited, the first network device can also instruct the terminal device to release it. In this way, the terminal device will no longer inherit these fields, so that the terminal device and the second network device have the same understanding of the fields, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the second network device.
作为另一种可选的实施方式,所述的全部或部分需要继承的字段,可以包括对应于第一版本的字段,包括对应于第一版本和第二版本之间的其他版本的字段,但不包括对应于第二版本的字段,也不包括对应于低于第二版本的其他版本所对应的字段。因为第二网络设备的通信版本为第二版本,因此无论是对应于第二版本的字段,或对应于低于第二版本的其他版本所对应的字段,都是第二网络设备能够支持的,第一网络设备如果将这些字段包括在配置信息中发送给第二网络设备,第二网络设备是能够识别的,也能够根据这些字段做进一步的配置。因此在这种方式下,第一网络设备需要确定第二网络设备的具体版本,也需要确定字段对应的版本,第一网络设备只是指示终端设备释放对应于第一版本的字段,以及释放对应于第一版本和第二版本之间的其他版本的字段,或者,第一网络设备指示释放高于第二版本的字段,但无需释放对应于第二版本的字段,以及无需释放对应于低于第二版本的其他版本所对应的字段。这样也能使得第二网络设备和终端设备对于配置信息的理解保持一致,且终端设备需要释放的字段较少,能够减轻终端设备的工作量。而且对于这些未释放的、第二网络设备能够识别的字段,第二网络设备也能进行进一步的配置,有助于减少第二网络设备的工作量。As another optional implementation manner, all or part of the fields that need to be inherited may include fields corresponding to the first version, including fields corresponding to other versions between the first version and the second version, but It does not include the fields corresponding to the second version, nor does it include the fields corresponding to other versions lower than the second version. Because the communication version of the second network device is the second version, no matter the fields corresponding to the second version or the fields corresponding to other versions lower than the second version, the second network device can support. If the first network device includes these fields in the configuration information and sends it to the second network device, the second network device can be identified and can also make further configurations based on these fields. Therefore, in this way, the first network device needs to determine the specific version of the second network device, and also the version corresponding to the field. The first network device just instructs the terminal device to release the field corresponding to the first version, and release the field corresponding to the first version. Fields of other versions between the first version and the second version, or the first network device instructs to release the fields higher than the second version, but does not need to release the fields corresponding to the second version, and does not need to release the fields corresponding to the lower version Fields corresponding to other versions of the second version. This can also make the second network device and the terminal device have consistent understanding of the configuration information, and the terminal device needs to release fewer fields, which can reduce the workload of the terminal device. Moreover, for these unreleased fields that can be recognized by the second network device, the second network device can also perform further configuration, which helps reduce the workload of the second network device.
其中,第一信息可以有不同的实现方式。Among them, the first information can be implemented in different ways.
作为第一信息的第一种可选的实施方式,第一信息可以是配置信息,例如第一信息可以根据配置信息2得到,将配置信息2中的需要继承的字段中的全部或部分字段中的每个字段的内容均设置为第一内容,由此所得到的配置信息,就可以是第一信息。第一内容可以指示释放相应的字段。例如,配置信息2包括第一字段,那么第一信息也包括第一字段,且第一字段的内容为第一内容,第一内容用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置,或者说用于指示释放第一字段的内容,也可以理解,第一字段的内容为第一内容即为第一字段的内容设置为“释放(release)”。那么终端设备接收第一信息后,根据第一字段所包括的第一内容,就会释放终端设备侧所存储的配置信息2包括的第一字段的内容,从而不再继续应用配置信息2所包括的第一字段对应的配置。As a first optional implementation manner of the first information, the first information may be configuration information. For example, the first information may be obtained according to the configuration information 2. All or part of the fields that need to be inherited in the configuration information 2 The content of each field of is set as the first content, and the configuration information obtained from this can be the first information. The first content may indicate the release of the corresponding field. For example, if the configuration information 2 includes the first field, then the first information also includes the first field, and the content of the first field is the first content, and the first content is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field, or to indicate To release the content of the first field, it can also be understood that the content of the first field is the first content, that is, the content of the first field is set to "release". Then after the terminal device receives the first information, according to the first content included in the first field, the content of the first field included in the configuration information 2 stored on the terminal device side will be released, so that the content included in the configuration information 2 is no longer applied. The configuration corresponding to the first field of.
在这种实施方式下,相当于第一网络设备重新向终端设备发送配置信息,该配置信息用于指示释放配置信息2所包括的全部或部分需要继承的字段。这种指示方式对于终端设备来说较为明确,终端设备根据第一信息所包括的字段就能够确定需要释放哪些字段。In this implementation manner, it is equivalent to the first network device resending configuration information to the terminal device, and the configuration information is used to instruct to release all or part of the fields included in the configuration information 2 that need to be inherited. This indication method is relatively clear for the terminal device, and the terminal device can determine which fields need to be released according to the fields included in the first information.
作为第一信息的第二种可选的实施方式,第一信息可以是指示信息,例如称为第一指示信息,第一指示信息可以占用一个或多个比特。第一指示信息可以指示释放一个或多个字段对应的配置,第一字段例如是这一个或多个字段中的一个。例如,第一指示信息占用一个比特,如果这一个比特的取值为“0”,则表示释放一个或多个字段对应的配置,如果这一个字段的取值为“1”,则表示不释放一个或多个字段对应的配置。或者,第一指示信息可占用一个或多个比特,如果第一网络设备向终端设备发送了第一指示信息,就表示释放一个或多个字段对应的配置,如果第一网络设备未向终端设备发送第一指示信息,就表示不释放一个或多个字段对应的配置。这一个或多个字段都是需要继承的字段,这一个或多个字段就是配置信息2所包括的全部或部分需要继承的字段,也就是说,第一指示信息用于指示释放配置信息2所包括的全部或部分需要继承的字段。终端设备接收第一指示信息后,就可以释放终端设备侧所存储的配置信息2包括的全部或部分需要继承的字段的内容,从而不再继续应用配置信息2所包括的这些字段对应的配置。例如终端设备释放的字段中包括第一字段。As a second optional implementation manner of the first information, the first information may be indication information, for example referred to as first indication information, and the first indication information may occupy one or more bits. The first indication information may indicate to release the configuration corresponding to one or more fields, and the first field is, for example, one of the one or more fields. For example, the first indication information occupies one bit. If the value of this bit is "0", it means that the configuration corresponding to one or more fields is released. If the value of this field is "1", it means that the configuration is not released. The configuration corresponding to one or more fields. Alternatively, the first indication information may occupy one or more bits. If the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device, it means that the configuration corresponding to one or more fields is released. If the first network device does not send the first indication information to the terminal device Sending the first indication information means that the configuration corresponding to one or more fields is not released. These one or more fields are all fields that need to be inherited. These one or more fields are all or part of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information 2. That is to say, the first indication information is used to indicate the release of the configuration information 2 All or part of the included fields need to be inherited. After receiving the first indication information, the terminal device can release all or part of the content of the fields that need to be inherited included in the configuration information 2 stored on the terminal device side, so that the configuration corresponding to these fields included in the configuration information 2 is no longer applied. For example, the field released by the terminal device includes the first field.
在这种实施方式下,第一网络设备无需向终端设备重新发送配置信息,而只需向终端设备发送第一指示信息,就能够指示释放相应的字段。相对于配置信息来说,第一指示信息的信息量较小,有助于节省传输开销。In this implementation manner, the first network device does not need to resend the configuration information to the terminal device, but only needs to send the first indication information to the terminal device to instruct the release of the corresponding field. Compared with the configuration information, the information amount of the first indication information is small, which helps to save transmission overhead.
S64、第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第一配置信息,相应的,第二网络设备接收来自第一网络设备的第一配置信息。例如,第一网络设备可以将第一配置信息包括在切换准备信息消息(例如图4所示的流程中的S41)中发送给第二网络设备。S64. The first network device sends the first configuration information to the second network device, and correspondingly, the second network device receives the first configuration information from the first network device. For example, the first network device may include the first configuration information in a handover preparation information message (for example, S41 in the process shown in FIG. 4) and send it to the second network device.
例如,第一网络设备可根据配置信息2得到第一配置信息。例如,第一网络设备从配置信息2中删除需要继承的字段中的全部或部分字段,由此所得到的配置信息,就可以是第一配置信息。第一网络设备从配置信息2中所删除的这些字段,也就是第一网络设备指示终端设备需要释放的字段。根据S63的介绍可知,第一网络设备删除的字段,可以包括对应于所有版本的字段,这里的所有版本包括第一版本、第二版本、第一版本和第二版本之间的其他版本、以及低于第二版本的其他版本。例如,第一网络设备从配置信息2中删除了第一字段,则第一配置信息就不包括第一字段,此时,第一字段可以对应于所有版本中的任意一个版本。或者,第一网络设备删除的字段,只包括对应于第一版本的字段以及对应于第一版本和第二版本之间的其他版本的字段,但不包括对应于第二版本的字段,也不包括对应于低于第一版本的其他版本的字段。例如,第一网络设备从配置信息2中删除了第一字段,则第一配置信息就不包括第一字段,此时,第一字段可以对应于第二版本,或对应于第二版本和第一版本之间的其他版本。For example, the first network device may obtain the first configuration information according to the configuration information 2. For example, the first network device deletes all or part of the fields that need to be inherited from the configuration information 2, and the configuration information obtained therefrom may be the first configuration information. The fields deleted by the first network device from the configuration information 2 are the fields that the first network device instructs the terminal device to release. According to the introduction of S63, the fields deleted by the first network device may include fields corresponding to all versions, and all versions here include the first version, the second version, other versions between the first version and the second version, and Other versions lower than the second version. For example, if the first network device deletes the first field from the configuration information 2, the first configuration information does not include the first field. In this case, the first field may correspond to any one of all versions. Or, the fields deleted by the first network device only include the fields corresponding to the first version and the fields corresponding to other versions between the first version and the second version, but do not include the fields corresponding to the second version, nor Include fields corresponding to other versions lower than the first version. For example, if the first network device deletes the first field from the configuration information 2, the first configuration information does not include the first field. In this case, the first field may correspond to the second version, or correspond to the second version and the second version. Other versions between one version.
第二网络设备得到第一配置信息后,可以根据第一配置信息来配置终端设备。由于第一配置信息并不包括第二网络设备无法识别的需要继承的字段,因此第二网络设备能够正常配置终端设备。例如第二网络设备可以得到第二配置信息,例如第二配置信息可以是根据第一配置信息得到的。对于第二网络设备能够支持的需要继承的字段,如果第二网络设备需要配置,则将该字段包括在第二配置信息中即可。After obtaining the first configuration information, the second network device can configure the terminal device according to the first configuration information. Since the first configuration information does not include fields that need to be inherited that the second network device cannot recognize, the second network device can configure the terminal device normally. For example, the second network device may obtain the second configuration information. For example, the second configuration information may be obtained according to the first configuration information. For fields that need to be inherited that can be supported by the second network device, if the second network device needs to be configured, the field may be included in the second configuration information.
S65、第二网络设备向终端设备发送第二配置信息,相应的,终端设备接收来自第二网络设备的第二配置信息。S65. The second network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second configuration information from the second network device.
第二网络设备得到第二配置信息后,可以发送给终端设备,从而终端设备能够根据第二配置信息进行配置,以在切换到第二网络设备后能够在第二网络设备下正常通信。例如,第二网络设备可以先将第二配置信息发送给第一网络设备,再由第一网络设备将第二配置信息发送给终端设备。例如第二网络设备可将第二配置信息包括在如图4所示的流程中的S43所述的切换控制消息中发送给第一网络设备,第一网络设备可将第二配置信息包括在如图4所示的流程中的S44所述的RRC重配置消息中发送给终端设备。After the second network device obtains the second configuration information, it can be sent to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can configure according to the second configuration information so as to be able to communicate normally under the second network device after switching to the second network device. For example, the second network device may first send the second configuration information to the first network device, and then the first network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device. For example, the second network device may include the second configuration information in the handover control message described in S43 in the process shown in FIG. 4 and send it to the first network device, and the first network device may include the second configuration information as The RRC reconfiguration message described in S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4 is sent to the terminal device.
S66、第一网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令,相应的,终端设备接收来自第一网络设备的切换命令。切换命令例如为图4所示的流程中的S44所述的RRC重配置消息,可用于指示终端设备切换到第二网络设备。在执行S66之后,可继续执行图4所示的流程中的S45等步骤,即,可继续执行小区切换过程。S66. The first network device sends a switching command to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the switching command from the first network device. The handover command is, for example, the RRC reconfiguration message described in S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4, which can be used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the second network device. After performing S66, the steps such as S45 in the flow shown in FIG. 4 can be continued, that is, the cell handover process can be continued.
其中,如果第一网络设备可将第二配置信息包括在如图4所示的流程中的S44所述的RRC重配置消息中发送给终端设备,那么S66实际上可以视为包括在S65中。Wherein, if the first network device can include the second configuration information in the RRC reconfiguration message described in S44 in the process shown in FIG. 4 and send it to the terminal device, then S66 can actually be regarded as being included in S65.
另外,本申请实施例中,第二网络设备所应用的配置方式是继承制的配置方式,或者说是迭代式的配置方式,即,需要基于前一次的配置来进行后一次的配置,例如基于第一网络设备的第一配置信息来确定第二配置信息,也就是说,第二配置信息不是采用全配置 的方式配置的。而在实际应用中,第二网络设备还可以采用全配置的方式,全配置方式为将待配置给终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。关于全配置的方式,可参考图5所示的实施例的相关介绍。本申请实施例并不限制第二网络设备所采用的配置方式,但是,如果第二网络设备采用了全配置的方式,则对于第一网络设备来说,就无需指示终端设备释放需要继承的字段。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the configuration mode applied by the second network device is the configuration mode of inheritance system, or iterative configuration mode, that is, the configuration mode of the next time needs to be performed based on the previous configuration, for example, based on The first configuration information of the first network device determines the second configuration information, that is, the second configuration information is not configured in a full configuration manner. In practical applications, the second network device may also adopt a full configuration mode, which is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured. Regarding the full configuration mode, reference may be made to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5. The embodiment of this application does not limit the configuration method adopted by the second network device, but if the second network device adopts the full configuration method, for the first network device, there is no need to instruct the terminal device to release the fields that need to be inherited .
因此,作为一种可选的实施方式,第二网络设备可以向第一网络设备发送配置指示信息,第一网络设备可接收来自第二网络设备的配置指示信息。该配置指示信息可指示第二网络设备使用全配置方式配置终端设备,或者指示第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置终端设备。关于配置指示信息的发送方式,可参考图5所示的实施例的相关介绍。第一网络设备接收配置指示信息后,如果配置指示信息指示第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置终端设备,则可以继续执行本申请实施例提供的技术方案,例如第一网络设备可以向终端设备发送第一信息;而如果配置指示信息指示第二网络设备使用全配置方式配置终端设备,则可以不必执行本申请实施例提供的技术方案,例如第一网络设备不必向终端设备发送第一信息。Therefore, as an optional implementation manner, the second network device may send configuration instruction information to the first network device, and the first network device may receive configuration instruction information from the second network device. The configuration instruction information may indicate that the second network device uses the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, or indicates that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device. Regarding the sending mode of the configuration indication information, reference may be made to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5. After the first network device receives the configuration instruction information, if the configuration instruction information indicates that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, it can continue to execute the technical solution provided in the embodiment of this application. For example, the first network device can send the terminal device Send the first information; and if the configuration instruction information indicates that the second network device uses the full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application may not be executed. For example, the first network device does not need to send the first information to the terminal device.
在本申请实施例中,第一网络设备如果确定第二网络设备的通信版本低于第一网络设备的通信版本,则可以指示终端设备释放全部或部分需要继承的字段对应的配置,这样,终端设备不再应用之前接收的这些字段所对应的配置。这样可以使得终端设备和目标网络设备应用的字段保持一致,使得终端设备在目标网络设备下能够正常通信。In the embodiment of the present application, if the first network device determines that the communication version of the second network device is lower than the communication version of the first network device, it can instruct the terminal device to release all or part of the configuration corresponding to the fields that need to be inherited. In this way, the terminal The device no longer applies the configuration corresponding to these fields previously received. In this way, the application fields of the terminal device and the target network device can be kept consistent, so that the terminal device can communicate normally under the target network device.
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例中用来实现上述方法的装置。因此,上文中的内容均可以用于后续实施例中,重复的内容不再赘述。The device used to implement the foregoing method in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. Therefore, the above content can all be used in the subsequent embodiments, and the repeated content will not be repeated.
图7为本申请实施例提供的通信装置700的示意性框图。示例性地,通信装置700例如为终端设备700。示例性地,终端设备700例如为图5所示的实施例所述的终端设备。FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 700 according to an embodiment of the application. Exemplarily, the communication apparatus 700 is a terminal device 700, for example. Exemplarily, the terminal device 700 is, for example, the terminal device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
终端设备700包括处理模块710和接收模块730。可选的,终端设备700还可以包括发送模块720。示例性地,终端设备700可以是终端设备,也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当终端设备700是终端设备时,发送模块720可以是发射器,发射器可以包括天线和射频电路等,接收模块730可以是接收器,接收器可以包括天线和射频电路等,其中,发射器和接收器可以分别是不同的模块,或者,发射器和接收器可以设置在同一功能模块中,该功能模块可称为收发器,处理模块710可以是处理器(或者,处理电路),例如基带处理器,基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU)。当终端设备700是具有上述终端设备功能的部件时,发送模块720可以是射频单元,接收模块也可以是射频单元,其中,发射器和接收器可以分别是不同的模块,或者,发射器和接收器可以设置在同一功能模块中,该功能模块可以是射频单元,处理模块710可以是处理器(或者,处理电路),例如基带处理器。当终端设备700是芯片系统时,发送模块720可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输出接口、接收模块730可以是芯片的输入接口(或者,如果输入接口和输出接口可以是同一接口,那么认为发送模块720和接收模块730是同一功能模块,即,芯片的输入输出接口)、处理模块710可以是芯片系统的处理器(或者,处理电路),处理器可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解,本申请实施例中的处理模块710可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件(或者,处理电路)实现,接收模块730可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现,发送模块720可以由发射器或发射器相关电路组件实现。The terminal device 700 includes a processing module 710 and a receiving module 730. Optionally, the terminal device 700 may further include a sending module 720. Exemplarily, the terminal device 700 may be a terminal device, or may be a chip applied in the terminal device or other combination devices, components, etc. having the above-mentioned terminal device functions. When the terminal device 700 is a terminal device, the transmitting module 720 may be a transmitter, the transmitter may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., the receiving module 730 may be a receiver, and the receiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., where the transmitter and The receiver may be different modules, or the transmitter and receiver may be set in the same functional module, which may be called a transceiver, and the processing module 710 may be a processor (or processing circuit), such as baseband processing The baseband processor may include one or more central processing units (central processing units, CPUs). When the terminal device 700 is a component with the above-mentioned terminal device functions, the sending module 720 may be a radio frequency unit, and the receiving module may also be a radio frequency unit, where the transmitter and receiver may be different modules, or the transmitter and receiver The processor may be arranged in the same functional module, the functional module may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 710 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor. When the terminal device 700 is a chip system, the sending module 720 may be the output interface of the chip (for example, a baseband chip), and the receiving module 730 may be the input interface of the chip (or, if the input interface and the output interface can be the same interface, it is considered that the transmission The module 720 and the receiving module 730 are the same functional module, that is, the input and output interface of the chip. The processing module 710 may be a processor (or a processing circuit) of the chip system, and the processor may include one or more central processing units. It should be understood that the processing module 710 in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by a processor or processor-related circuit components (or processing circuits), the receiving module 730 may be implemented by a transceiver or transceiver-related circuit components, and the sending module 720 may be implemented by The transmitter or transmitter-related circuit components are implemented.
例如,处理模块710可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S56~S58,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。发送模块720可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作,例如S52,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。接收模块730可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作,例如S51、S53和S55,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。For example, the processing module 710 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S56 to S58, and/or other operations used to support the technology described herein. process. The sending module 720 may be used to perform all the sending operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S52, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein. The receiving module 730 may be used to perform all receiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S51, S53, and S55, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
另外,发送模块720和接收模块730可以是一个功能模块,该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作,该功能模块可称为收发模块,例如收发模块可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作,例如,在执行发送操作时,可以认为收发模块是发送模块,而在执行接收操作时,可以认为收发模块是接收模块;或者,发送模块720和接收模块730也可以是两个功能模块,收发模块也可以视为这两个功能模块的统称,发送模块720用于完成发送操作,例如发送模块720可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作,接收模块730用于完成接收操作,例如接收模块730可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。In addition, the sending module 720 and the receiving module 730 may be a functional module, which can complete both the sending operation and the receiving operation. The functional module can be called a transceiver module. For example, the transceiver module can be used to perform the All the sending and receiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment, for example, when performing the sending operation, the transceiver module can be considered as the sending module, and when performing the receiving operation, the transceiver module can be considered as the receiving module; or The module 720 and the receiving module 730 can also be two functional modules. The transceiver module can also be regarded as a collective term for these two functional modules. The sending module 720 is used to complete the sending operation. For example, the sending module 720 can be used to perform the operation shown in FIG. 5 For all the sending operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment, the receiving module 730 is used to complete the receiving operation. For example, the receiving module 730 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
其中,处理模块710,用于在小区切换前,确定第一网络设备的第一配置信息,所述第一网络设备为终端设备700进行所述小区切换的源网络设备;Wherein, the processing module 710 is configured to determine first configuration information of the first network device before the cell handover, and the first network device is the source network device from which the terminal device 700 performs the cell handover;
接收模块730,用于在所述小区切换过程中,接收来自第二网络设备的第二配置信息,所述第二网络设备为终端设备700进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备;The receiving module 730 is configured to receive second configuration information from a second network device during the cell handover process, where the second network device is a target network device for the terminal device 700 to perform the cell handover;
处理模块710,还用于确定所述第一配置信息包括第一字段,且所述第二配置信息不包括所述第一字段,其中,所述第一字段为当终端设备700接收的所述第二配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,终端设备700需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段;The processing module 710 is further configured to determine that the first configuration information includes a first field, and the second configuration information does not include the first field, where the first field is the first field received by the terminal device 700 When the second configuration information does not include the first field, the terminal device 700 needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time;
处理模块710,还用于释放所述第一配置信息所包括的所述第一字段对应的配置。The processing module 710 is further configured to release the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。As an optional implementation manner, the first field includes overheating configuration information.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述过热配置信息包括:As an optional implementation manner, the overheating configuration information includes:
第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示能否向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或,First indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,终端设备700不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein the terminal device 700 cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device within the running time of the prohibition timer.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:As an optional implementation manner, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
终端设备700支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal device 700;
终端设备700支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device 700;
终端设备700在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device 700 can support in each supported frequency band;
终端设备700在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device 700 can support in each supported frequency band;
终端设备700在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device 700 can support in each supported frequency band;
终端设备700在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device 700 can support in each supported frequency band; or,
终端设备700的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device 700.
作为一种可选的实施方式,处理模块710,还用于在释放所述第一配置信息所包括的所述第一字段之前,确定所述第二配置信息中不包括第一版本对应的字段,以及不包括高于所述第一版本的任意版本所对应的字段,所述第一版本为所述第一字段对应的通信版本。As an optional implementation manner, the processing module 710 is further configured to determine that the second configuration information does not include a field corresponding to the first version before releasing the first field included in the first configuration information , And does not include a field corresponding to any version higher than the first version, and the first version is the communication version corresponding to the first field.
作为一种可选的实施方式,处理模块710,还用于将终端设备700的能力由第一能力 调整为第二能力,其中,所述第一能力低于所述第二能力,所述第一能力是所述第一网络设备为适配所述第一字段的内容而配置的。As an optional implementation manner, the processing module 710 is further configured to adjust the capability of the terminal device 700 from a first capability to a second capability, where the first capability is lower than the second capability, and the first capability is lower than the second capability. A capability is configured by the first network device to adapt the content of the first field.
关于终端设备700所能实现的其他功能,可参考图5所示的实施例的相关介绍,不多赘述。Regarding other functions that can be implemented by the terminal device 700, reference may be made to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, which will not be described in detail.
图8为本申请实施例提供的通信装置800的示意性框图。示例性地,通信装置800例如为第一网络设备800。示例性地,第一网络设备800例如为图6所示的实施例所述的网络设备。FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 800 provided by an embodiment of the application. Exemplarily, the communication apparatus 800 is, for example, the first network device 800. Exemplarily, the first network device 800 is, for example, the network device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6.
第一网络设备800包括处理模块810和发送模块820。可选的,第一网络设备800还包括接收模块830。示例性地,第一网络设备800可以是网络设备(例如,接入网设备),也可以是应用于网络设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述第一网络设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当第一网络设备800是网络设备时,发送模块820可以是发射器,发射器可以包括天线和射频电路等,接收模块830可以是接收器,接收器可以包括天线和射频电路等,其中,发射器和接收器可以分别是不同的模块,或者,发射器和接收器可以设置在同一功能模块中,该功能模块可称为收发器,处理模块810可以是处理器(或者,处理电路),例如基带处理器,基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当第一网络设备800是具有上述第一网络设备功能的部件时,发送模块820可以是射频单元,接收模块也可以是射频单元,其中,发射器和接收器可以分别是不同的模块,或者,发射器和接收器可以设置在同一功能模块中,该功能模块可以是射频单元,处理模块810可以是处理器(或者,处理电路),例如基带处理器。当第一网络设备800是芯片系统时,发送模块820可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输出接口、接收模块830可以是芯片的输入接口(或者,如果输入接口和输出接口可以是同一接口,那么认为发送模块820和接收模块830是同一功能模块,即,芯片的输入输出接口)、处理模块810可以是芯片系统的处理器(或者,处理电路),处理器可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解,本申请实施例中的处理模块810可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件(或者,处理电路)实现,接收模块830可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现,发送模块820可以由发射器或发射器相关电路组件实现。The first network device 800 includes a processing module 810 and a sending module 820. Optionally, the first network device 800 further includes a receiving module 830. Exemplarily, the first network device 800 may be a network device (for example, an access network device), and may also be a chip applied to the network device or other combination devices or components having the function of the first network device described above. When the first network device 800 is a network device, the sending module 820 may be a transmitter, the transmitter may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., the receiving module 830 may be a receiver, and the receiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., where the transmitter The transmitter and the receiver may be different modules, or the transmitter and the receiver may be provided in the same functional module, which may be called a transceiver, and the processing module 810 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), for example Baseband processor. The baseband processor may include one or more CPUs. When the first network device 800 is a component with the above-mentioned first network device function, the sending module 820 may be a radio frequency unit, and the receiving module may also be a radio frequency unit, where the transmitter and receiver may be different modules, or, The transmitter and the receiver may be arranged in the same functional module, the functional module may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 810 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor. When the first network device 800 is a chip system, the sending module 820 may be the output interface of the chip (for example, a baseband chip), and the receiving module 830 may be the input interface of the chip (or, if the input interface and the output interface can be the same interface, then It is considered that the sending module 820 and the receiving module 830 are the same functional module, that is, the input and output interface of the chip, and the processing module 810 may be the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip system, and the processor may include one or more central processing units. . It should be understood that the processing module 810 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or processor-related circuit components (or processing circuits), the receiving module 830 may be implemented by a transceiver or transceiver-related circuit components, and the sending module 820 may be implemented by The transmitter or transmitter-related circuit components are implemented.
例如,处理模块810可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第一网络设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S62,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。发送模块820可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第一网络设备所执行的全部发送操作,例如S63、S64和S66,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。接收模块830可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第一网络设备所执行的全部接收操作,例如S61,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。For example, the processing module 810 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operation performed by the first network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S62, and/or other operations used to support the technology described herein. process. The sending module 820 may be used to perform all the sending operations performed by the first network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S63, S64, and S66, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein. The receiving module 830 may be used to perform all receiving operations performed by the first network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S61, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
另外,关于发送模块820和接收模块830的实现方式,可参考对于发送模块720和接收模块730的实现方式的介绍。In addition, for the implementation of the sending module 820 and the receiving module 830, reference may be made to the introduction of the implementation of the sending module 720 and the receiving module 730.
其中,处理模块810,用于确定第二版本低于第一版本,所述第一版本为第一网络设备800的通信版本,所述第二版本为第二网络设备对应的通信版本,第一网络设备800为终端设备进行小区切换的源网络设备,所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备;The processing module 810 is configured to determine that the second version is lower than the first version, the first version is the communication version of the first network device 800, and the second version is the communication version corresponding to the second network device. The network device 800 is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
发送模块820,用于向所述终端设备发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段;The sending module 820 is configured to send first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used to instruct to release the configuration corresponding to the first field, where the first field is when the configuration information received by the terminal device is not When the first field is included, the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time;
发送模块820,还用于向所述终端设备发送切换命令,所述切换命令用于指示从第一网络设备800切换到所述第二网络设备。The sending module 820 is further configured to send a switching command to the terminal device, where the switching command is used to instruct to switch from the first network device 800 to the second network device.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述第一字段对应于所述第一版本,或,对应于所述第一版本与所述第二版本之间的其他版本。As an optional implementation manner, the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to another version between the first version and the second version.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述第一信息用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置,包括:As an optional implementation manner, the first information is used to indicate to release the configuration corresponding to the first field, including:
所述第一信息包括所述第一字段,且所述第一字段的内容用于指示释放所述第一字段对应的配置;或者,The first information includes the first field, and the content of the first field is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field; or,
所述第一信息为第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示释放一个或多个字段对应的配置,所述一个或多个字段包括所述第一字段,所述一个或多个字段中的每个字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述字段的内容的字段。The first information is first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to one or more fields, the one or more fields include the first field, and the one or more fields Each field in the field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the field received last time when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the field.
作为一种可选的实施方式,发送模块820,还用于向所述第二网络设备发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括第一网络设备800为所述终端设备配置的字段,且所述第一配置信息不包括所述第一字段。As an optional implementation manner, the sending module 820 is further configured to send first configuration information to the second network device, where the first configuration information includes fields configured by the first network device 800 for the terminal device, And the first configuration information does not include the first field.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。As an optional implementation manner, the first field includes overheating configuration information.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述过热配置信息包括:As an optional implementation manner, the overheating configuration information includes:
第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示能否向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或,Second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:As an optional implementation manner, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
作为一种可选的实施方式,接收模块830,用于接收来自所述第二网络设备的版本指示信息,所述版本指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备的通信版本为所述第二版本。As an optional implementation manner, the receiving module 830 is configured to receive version indication information from the second network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate that the communication version of the second network device is the second network device. Version.
作为一种可选的实施方式,接收模块830,用于接收来自所述第二网络设备的配置指示信息,所述配置指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置所述终端设备,所述全配置方式为将待配置给所述终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。As an optional implementation manner, the receiving module 830 is configured to receive configuration indication information from the second network device, where the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use the full configuration mode to configure the For the terminal device, the full configuration mode is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
关于第一网络设备800所能实现的其他功能,可参考图6所示的实施例的相关介绍,不多赘述。Regarding other functions that can be implemented by the first network device 800, reference may be made to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, which will not be repeated.
图9为本申请实施例提供的通信装置900的示意性框图。示例性地,通信装置900例如为第二网络设备900。示例性地,第二网络设备900例如为图6所示的实施例所述的网络设备。FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 900 according to an embodiment of the application. Exemplarily, the communication device 900 is, for example, the second network device 900. Exemplarily, the second network device 900 is, for example, the network device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6.
第二网络设备900包括发送模块920和接收模块930。可选的,第二网络设备900还包括处理模块910。示例性地,第二网络设备900可以是网络设备(例如,接入网设备), 也可以是应用于网络设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述第二网络设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当第二网络设备900是网络设备时,发送模块920可以是发射器,发射器可以包括天线和射频电路等,接收模块930可以是接收器,接收器可以包括天线和射频电路等,其中,发射器和接收器可以分别是不同的模块,或者,发射器和接收器可以设置在同一功能模块中,该功能模块可称为收发器,处理模块910可以是处理器(或者,处理电路),例如基带处理器,基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当第二网络设备900是具有上述第二网络设备功能的部件时,发送模块920可以是射频单元,接收模块也可以是射频单元,其中,发射器和接收器可以分别是不同的模块,或者,发射器和接收器可以设置在同一功能模块中,该功能模块可以是射频单元,处理模块910可以是处理器(或者,处理电路),例如基带处理器。当第二网络设备900是芯片系统时,发送模块920可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输出接口、接收模块930可以是芯片的输入接口(或者,如果输入接口和输出接口可以是同一接口,那么认为发送模块920和接收模块930是同一功能模块,即,芯片的输入输出接口)、处理模块910可以是芯片系统的处理器(或者,处理电路),处理器可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解,本申请实施例中的处理模块910可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件(或者,处理电路)实现,接收模块930可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现,发送模块920可以由发射器或发射器相关电路组件实现。The second network device 900 includes a sending module 920 and a receiving module 930. Optionally, the second network device 900 further includes a processing module 910. Exemplarily, the second network device 900 may be a network device (for example, an access network device), or may be a chip applied to the network device or other combination devices or components having the function of the second network device described above. When the second network device 900 is a network device, the sending module 920 may be a transmitter, the transmitter may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., the receiving module 930 may be a receiver, and the receiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., where the transmitter The transmitter and the receiver may be different modules, or the transmitter and the receiver may be set in the same functional module, which may be called a transceiver, and the processing module 910 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), for example Baseband processor. The baseband processor may include one or more CPUs. When the second network device 900 is a component with the above-mentioned second network device function, the sending module 920 may be a radio frequency unit, and the receiving module may also be a radio frequency unit, where the transmitter and receiver may be different modules, or, The transmitter and the receiver may be provided in the same functional module, the functional module may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 910 may be a processor (or a processing circuit), such as a baseband processor. When the second network device 900 is a chip system, the sending module 920 may be the output interface of the chip (for example, a baseband chip), and the receiving module 930 may be the input interface of the chip (or, if the input interface and the output interface may be the same interface, then It is considered that the sending module 920 and the receiving module 930 are the same functional module, that is, the input and output interface of the chip, and the processing module 910 may be the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip system, and the processor may include one or more central processing units. . It should be understood that the processing module 910 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or processor-related circuit components (or processing circuits), the receiving module 930 may be implemented by a transceiver or transceiver-related circuit components, and the sending module 920 may be implemented by The transmitter or transmitter-related circuit components are implemented.
例如,处理模块910可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第二网络设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如确定第二配置信息的操作,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。发送模块920可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第二网络设备所执行的全部发送操作,例如S61和S65,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。接收模块930可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第二网络设备所执行的全部接收操作,例如S64,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。For example, the processing module 910 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operation performed by the second network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as the operation of determining the second configuration information, and/or to support the text Other processes of the described technique. The sending module 920 may be used to perform all the sending operations performed by the second network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S61 and S65, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein. The receiving module 930 may be used to perform all receiving operations performed by the second network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S64, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
另外,关于发送模块920和接收模块930的实现方式,可参考对于发送模块720和接收模块730的实现方式的介绍。In addition, for the implementation of the sending module 920 and the receiving module 930, reference may be made to the introduction of the implementation of the sending module 720 and the receiving module 730.
其中,发送模块920,用于向第一网络设备发送版本指示信息,所述版本指示信息用于指示第二版本,所述第二版本为第二网络设备900的通信版本;Wherein, the sending module 920 is configured to send version indication information to the first network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate a second version, and the second version is a communication version of the second network device 900;
接收模块930,用于接收来自所述第一网络设备的第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一网络设备为终端设备配置的字段,且所述第一配置信息不包括第一字段,所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备进行小区切换的源网络设备,第二网络设备900为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段。The receiving module 930 is configured to receive first configuration information from the first network device, where the first configuration information includes fields configured by the first network device for the terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include the first configuration information. A field, the first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, and the second network device 900 is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover, wherein the first field is When the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the first field, the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述第一字段对应于第一版本,或,对应于第一版本与所述第二版本之间的其他版本,所述第一版本为所述第一网络设备的通信版本,其中,所述第二版本低于所述第一版本。As an optional implementation manner, the first field corresponds to a first version, or corresponds to another version between the first version and the second version, and the first version is the first network The communication version of the device, wherein the second version is lower than the first version.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。As an optional implementation manner, the first field includes overheating configuration information.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述过热配置信息包括:As an optional implementation manner, the overheating configuration information includes:
第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示是否能够向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或,Second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能 向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:As an optional implementation manner, the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
作为一种可选的实施方式,发送模块920,还用于向所述第一网络设备发送配置指示信息,所述配置指示信息用于指示第二网络设备900未使用全配置方式配置所述终端设备,所述全配置方式为将待配置给所述终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。As an optional implementation manner, the sending module 920 is further configured to send configuration indication information to the first network device, where the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device 900 has not configured the terminal in a full configuration mode Device, the full configuration mode is a mode in which all fields to be configured to the terminal device are reconfigured.
作为一种可选的实施方式,发送模块920,还用于向所述终端设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括第二网络设备900为所述终端设备配置的字段,且所述第二配置信息是根据所述第一配置信息得到的。As an optional implementation manner, the sending module 920 is further configured to send second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information includes fields configured by the second network device 900 for the terminal device, and The second configuration information is obtained according to the first configuration information.
关于第二网络设备900所能实现的其他功能,可参考图6所示的实施例的相关介绍,不多赘述。For other functions that can be implemented by the second network device 900, reference may be made to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, which will not be repeated.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端设备也可以是电路。该通信装置可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备所执行的动作。The embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, and the communication device may be a terminal device or a circuit. The communication device can be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
当该通信装置为终端设备时,图10示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便,图10中,终端设备以手机作为例子。如图10所示,终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是,有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。When the communication device is a terminal device, FIG. 10 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate. In FIG. 10, the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example. As shown in Figure 10, the terminal equipment includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device. The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data. The radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signal and radio frequency signal and the processing of radio frequency signal. The antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal devices may not have input and output devices.
当需要发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明,图10中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备产品中,可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置,也可以是与处理器集成在一起,本申请实施例对此不做限制。When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data. For ease of description, only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 10. In an actual terminal device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device. The memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元(收发单元可以是一个功能单元,该功能单元能够实现发送功能和接收功能;或者,收发单元也可以包括两个功能单元,分别为能够实现接收功能的接收单元和能够实现发送功能的发送单元),将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。如图10所示,终端设备包括收发单元1010和处理单元1020。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置 等。处理单元也可以称为处理器,处理单板,处理模块、处理装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元1010中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元1010中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元1010包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。In the embodiments of the present application, the antenna and radio frequency circuit with transceiving functions can be regarded as the transceiving unit of the terminal device (the transceiving unit can be a functional unit that can realize the sending and receiving functions; alternatively, the transceiving unit can also be It includes two functional units, namely a receiving unit capable of realizing the receiving function and a transmitting unit capable of realizing the transmitting function), and the processor with the processing function is regarded as the processing unit of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 10, the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1010 and a processing unit 1020. The transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and so on. The processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and so on. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1010 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1010 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1010 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit. The transceiver unit may sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit. The receiving unit may sometimes be referred to as a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit. The sending unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
应理解,收发单元1010可用于执行上述图5所示的实施例中终端设备侧的发送操作和接收操作,处理单元1020用于执行上述图5所示的实施例中终端设备上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。It should be understood that the transceiving unit 1010 can be used to perform the sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the embodiment shown in FIG. Other operations.
当该通信装置为芯片类的装置或者电路时,该装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。其中,所述收发单元可以是输入输出电路和/或通信接口;处理单元为集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。When the communication device is a chip-type device or circuit, the device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit. Wherein, the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit and/or a communication interface; the processing unit is an integrated processor or microprocessor or integrated circuit.
本实施例中的通信装置为终端设备时,可以参照图11所示的设备。作为一个例子,该设备可以完成类似于图7中终端设备700的功能。例如,上述实施例中的处理模块710可以是图11中的该处理器1110,并完成相应的功能;上述实施例中的发送模块720可以是图11中的发送数据处理器1120,并完成相应的功能;上述实施例中的接收模块730可以是图11中接收数据处理器1130,并完成相应的功能。虽然图11中示出了信道编码器、信道解码器,但是可以理解这些模块并不对本实施例构成限制性说明,仅是示意性的。When the communication device in this embodiment is a terminal device, the device shown in FIG. 11 can be referred to. As an example, the device can perform functions similar to the terminal device 700 in FIG. 7. For example, the processing module 710 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 1110 in FIG. 11 and complete the corresponding function; the sending module 720 in the foregoing embodiment may be the data sending processor 1120 in FIG. 11 and complete the corresponding function The receiving module 730 in the above-mentioned embodiment may be the receiving data processor 1130 in FIG. 11, and complete the corresponding function. Although the channel encoder and the channel decoder are shown in FIG. 11, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, and are only illustrative.
图12示出本实施例的另一种形式。处理装置1200中包括调制子系统、中央处理子系统、周边子系统等模块。本实施例中的通信装置可以作为其中的调制子系统。具体的,该调制子系统可以包括处理器1203,接口1204。其中,处理器1203完成上述处理模块710的功能,接口1204完成上述发送模块720和接收模块730的功能。作为另一种变形,该调制子系统包括存储器1206、处理器1203及存储在存储器1206上并可在处理器上运行的程序,该处理器1203执行该程序时实现上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的方法。需要注意的是,所述存储器1206可以是非易失性的,也可以是易失性的,其位置可以位于调制子系统内部,也可以位于处理装置1200中,只要该存储器1206可以连接到所述处理器1203即可。Fig. 12 shows another form of this embodiment. The processing device 1200 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem. The communication device in this embodiment can be used as a modulation subsystem therein. Specifically, the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1203 and an interface 1204. Among them, the processor 1203 completes the functions of the aforementioned processing module 710, and the interface 1204 completes the aforementioned functions of the sending module 720 and the receiving module 730. As another variation, the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1206, a processor 1203, and a program stored on the memory 1206 and running on the processor. The processor 1203 executes the program on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment. Methods. It should be noted that the memory 1206 can be non-volatile or volatile, and its location can be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1200, as long as the memory 1206 can be connected to the The processor 1203 is fine.
本申请实施例中的装置为网络设备时,该装置可以如图13所示。装置1300包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)1310和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)(也可称为数字单元,digital unit,DU)1320。所述RRU 1310可以称为收发模块,该收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块,或者,该收发模块可以是一个能够实现发送和接收功能的模块。该收发模块可以与图8中的发送模块820和接收模块830对应。或者,该收发模块可以与图9中的发送模块920和接收模块930对应。可选地,该收发模块还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线1311和射频单元1312。所述RRU 1310部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 1320部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 1310与BBU 1320可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。When the device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device, the device may be as shown in FIG. 13. The device 1300 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1310 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as digital unit, digital unit, DU) 1320 . The RRU 1310 may be referred to as a transceiver module, and the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module, or the transceiver module may be a module capable of implementing sending and receiving functions. The transceiver module may correspond to the sending module 820 and the receiving module 830 in FIG. 8. Alternatively, the transceiver module may correspond to the sending module 920 and the receiving module 930 in FIG. 9. Optionally, the transceiver module may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 1311 and a radio frequency unit 1312. The RRU 1310 part is mainly used for receiving and sending radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment. The 1320 part of the BBU is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the base station, and so on. The RRU 1310 and the BBU 1320 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU 1320为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理模块,可以与图8中的处理模块810对应,或者可以与图9中的处理模块910对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理模块)可以用于控制基站执行上述 方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,生成上述指示信息等。The BBU 1320 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing module. It may correspond to the processing module 810 in FIG. 8, or may correspond to the processing module 910 in FIG. 9, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel Encoding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc. For example, the BBU (processing module) may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
在一个示例中,所述BBU 1320可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络,5G网络或其他网络)。所述BBU 1320还包括存储器1321和处理器1322。所述存储器1321用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器1322用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器1321和处理器1322可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 1320 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 1320 also includes a memory 1321 and a processor 1322. The memory 1321 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 1322 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 1321 and the processor 1322 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
本申请实施例提供第一通信系统。第一通信系统可以包括上述的图5所示的实施例所涉及的终端设备。终端设备例如为图7中的终端设备700。The embodiment of the present application provides a first communication system. The first communication system may include the terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 described above. The terminal device is, for example, the terminal device 700 in FIG. 7.
本申请实施例提供第二通信系统。第二通信系统可以包括上述的图6所示的实施例所涉及的第一网络设备,以及包括上述的图6所示的实施例所涉及的第二网络设备。第一网络设备例如为图8中的第一网络设备800。第二网络设备例如为图9中的第二网络设备900。The embodiment of the present application provides a second communication system. The second communication system may include the first network device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 and the second network device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 described above. The first network device is, for example, the first network device 800 in FIG. 8. The second network device is, for example, the second network device 900 in FIG. 9.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 5 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the terminal device in the embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与第一网络设备相关的流程。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 6 provided by the foregoing method embodiment The process related to the first network device in the embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与第二网络设备相关的流程。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 6 provided by the foregoing method embodiment The process related to the second network device in the embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与第一网络设备相关的流程。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. The process related to the first network device.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与第二网络设备相关的流程。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. The process related to the second network device.
应理解,本申请实施例中提及的处理器可以是CPU,还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that the processor mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a CPU, other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), ready-made Field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
还应理解,本申请实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读 存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), a Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), and synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
需要说明的是,当处理器为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时,存储器(存储模块)集成在处理器中。It should be noted that when the processor is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, or discrete hardware component, the memory (storage module) is integrated in the processor.
应注意,本文描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It should be noted that the memories described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may be aware that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device, and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案的部分后者全部可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的计算机可读存储介质,可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。以此为例但不限于:计算机可读介质可以包括随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read only memory,EEPROM)、紧凑型光盘 只读存储器(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)、通用串行总线闪存盘(universal serial bus flash disk)、移动硬盘、或其他光盘存储、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the latter part of the technical solution of the present application can all be embodied in the form of a software product. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer). , A server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer. Take this as an example but not limited to: computer-readable media may include random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), and electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically erasable programmable read-only memory). read only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), universal serial bus flash disk (universal serial bus flash disk), mobile hard disk, or other optical disk storage, disk storage A medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本申请实施例的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of the present application, but the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes within the technical scope disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. Or replacement should be covered within the protection scope of the embodiments of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (26)

  1. 一种配置终端设备的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for configuring terminal equipment, characterized in that it comprises:
    在小区切换前,确定第一网络设备的第一配置信息,所述第一网络设备为终端设备进行所述小区切换的源网络设备;Before the cell handover, determine first configuration information of the first network device, where the first network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
    在所述小区切换过程中,接收来自第二网络设备的第二配置信息,所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备;In the cell handover process, receiving second configuration information from a second network device, where the second network device is a target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
    确定所述第一配置信息包括第一字段,且所述第二配置信息不包括所述第一字段,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的所述第二配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段;It is determined that the first configuration information includes a first field, and the second configuration information does not include the first field, where the first field is when the second configuration information received by the terminal device does not include When the first field is the first field, the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time;
    释放所述第一配置信息所包括的所述第一字段对应的配置。Releasing the configuration corresponding to the first field included in the first configuration information.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述过热配置信息包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the overheating configuration information comprises:
    第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示能否向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或,First indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
    禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:The method according to claim 3, wherein the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
    所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
    所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
    所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
  5. 根据权利要求1~4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在释放所述第一配置信息所包括的所述第一字段之前,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein before releasing the first field included in the first configuration information, the method further comprises:
    确定所述第二配置信息中不包括第一版本对应的字段,以及不包括高于所述第一版本的任意版本所对应的字段,所述第一版本为所述第一字段对应的通信版本。It is determined that the second configuration information does not include the field corresponding to the first version, and does not include the field corresponding to any version higher than the first version, and the first version is the communication version corresponding to the first field .
  6. 根据权利要求1~5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the method further comprises:
    将所述终端设备的能力由第一能力调整为第二能力,其中,所述第一能力低于所述第二能力,所述第一能力是所述第一网络设备为适配所述第一字段的内容而配置的。The capability of the terminal device is adjusted from a first capability to a second capability, where the first capability is lower than the second capability, and the first capability is that the first network device is adapted to the second capability. The content of a field is configured.
  7. 一种配置终端设备的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for configuring terminal equipment, characterized in that it comprises:
    确定第二版本低于第一版本,所述第一版本为第一网络设备的通信版本,所述第二版本为第二网络设备对应的通信版本,所述第一网络设备为终端设备进行小区切换的源网络设备,所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备;It is determined that the second version is lower than the first version, the first version is the communication version of the first network device, the second version is the communication version corresponding to the second network device, and the first network device is the terminal device for cell communication. The source network device of the handover, and the second network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover;
    向所述终端设备发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段;Send first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used to instruct to release the configuration corresponding to the first field, where the first field is when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the first field When the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time;
    向所述终端设备发送切换命令,所述切换命令用于指示从所述第一网络设备切换到所述第二网络设备。Send a switching command to the terminal device, where the switching command is used to instruct to switch from the first network device to the second network device.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一字段对应于所述第一版本,或,对应于所述第一版本与所述第二版本之间的其他版本。The method according to claim 7, wherein the first field corresponds to the first version, or corresponds to another version between the first version and the second version.
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息用于指示释放第一字段对应的配置,包括:The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the first information is used to instruct to release the configuration corresponding to the first field, comprising:
    所述第一信息包括所述第一字段,且所述第一字段的内容用于指示释放所述第一字段对应的配置;或者,The first information includes the first field, and the content of the first field is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to the first field; or,
    所述第一信息为第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示释放一个或多个字段对应的配置,所述一个或多个字段包括所述第一字段,所述一个或多个字段中的每个字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述字段的内容的字段。The first information is first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the release of the configuration corresponding to one or more fields, the one or more fields include the first field, and the one or more fields Each field in the field is a field in which the terminal device needs to keep the content of the field received last time when the configuration information received by the terminal device does not include the field.
  10. 根据权利要求7~9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 7-9, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述第二网络设备发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备配置的字段,且所述第一配置信息不包括所述第一字段。Sending first configuration information to the second network device, where the first configuration information includes a field configured by the first network device for the terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include the first field.
  11. 根据权利要求7~10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 7 to 10, wherein the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述过热配置信息包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the overheating configuration information comprises:
    第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示能否向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或,Second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or,
    禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:The method according to claim 12, wherein the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
    所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
    所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
    所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
  14. 根据权利要求7~13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 7-13, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述第二网络设备的版本指示信息,所述版本指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备的通信版本为所述第二版本。Receiving version indication information from the second network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate that the communication version of the second network device is the second version.
  15. 根据权利要求7~14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 7 to 14, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述第二网络设备的配置指示信息,所述配置指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置所述终端设备,所述全配置方式为将待配置给所述终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。Receiving configuration indication information from the second network device, where the configuration indication information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use a full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, and the full configuration mode is to configure the terminal device to be configured to the The way in which all fields of the terminal device are reconfigured.
  16. 一种配置终端设备的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for configuring terminal equipment, characterized in that it comprises:
    向第一网络设备发送版本指示信息,所述版本指示信息用于指示第二版本,所述第二 版本为第二网络设备的通信版本;Sending version indication information to the first network device, where the version indication information is used to indicate a second version, and the second version is a communication version of the second network device;
    接收来自所述第一网络设备的第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一网络设备为终端设备配置的字段,且所述第一配置信息不包括第一字段,所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备进行小区切换的源网络设备,所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备进行所述小区切换的目标网络设备,其中,所述第一字段为当所述终端设备接收的配置信息不包括所述第一字段时,所述终端设备需要保持上次接收的所述第一字段的内容的字段。Receiving first configuration information from the first network device, where the first configuration information includes a field configured by the first network device for a terminal device, and the first configuration information does not include a first field, and the first configuration information A network device is the source network device for the terminal device to perform cell handover, the first network device is the target network device for the terminal device to perform the cell handover, and the first field is when the terminal device When the received configuration information does not include the first field, the terminal device needs to keep the field of the content of the first field received last time.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一字段对应于第一版本,或,对应于第一版本与所述第二版本之间的其他版本,所述第一版本为所述第一网络设备的通信版本,其中,所述第二版本低于所述第一版本。The method according to claim 16, wherein the first field corresponds to a first version, or corresponds to other versions between the first version and the second version, and the first version is The communication version of the first network device, wherein the second version is lower than the first version.
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一字段包括过热配置信息。The method according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the first field includes overheating configuration information.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述过热配置信息包括:The method according to claim 18, wherein the overheating configuration information comprises:
    第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示是否能够向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息;和/或Second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate whether auxiliary information related to overheating can be sent to the network device; and/or
    禁止定时器的定时时长,其中,在所述禁止定时器的运行时间内,所述终端设备不能向网络设备发送过热相关的辅助信息。The timing duration of the prohibition timer, wherein, within the running time of the prohibition timer, the terminal device cannot send auxiliary information related to overheating to the network device.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述过热相关的辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项:The method according to claim 19, wherein the auxiliary information related to overheating includes one or more of the following:
    所述终端设备支持的上行最大辅载波数量或上行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of uplink secondary carriers or the maximum number of uplink secondary cells supported by the terminal equipment;
    所述终端设备支持的下行最大辅载波数量或下行最大辅小区数量;The maximum number of downlink secondary carriers or the maximum number of downlink secondary cells supported by the terminal device;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大聚合带宽;The maximum uplink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大聚合带宽;The maximum downlink aggregate bandwidth that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的上行最大MIMO层数;The maximum number of uplink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band;
    所述终端设备在所支持的每个频段所能够支持的下行最大MIMO层数;或,The maximum number of downlink MIMO layers that the terminal device can support in each supported frequency band; or,
    所述终端设备的类型信息。Type information of the terminal device.
  21. 根据权利要求16~20任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 16 to 20, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述第一网络设备发送配置指示信息,所述配置指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备未使用全配置方式配置所述终端设备,所述全配置方式为将待配置给所述终端设备的全部字段均重新配置的方式。Send configuration instruction information to the first network device, where the configuration instruction information is used to indicate that the second network device does not use a full configuration mode to configure the terminal device, and the full configuration mode is to configure the terminal device to be configured The way in which all fields of the device are reconfigured.
  22. 根据权利要求16~21任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 16-21, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述终端设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备配置的字段,且所述第二配置信息是根据所述第一配置信息得到的。Sending second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information includes fields configured by the second network device for the terminal device, and the second configuration information is obtained according to the first configuration information .
  23. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:A terminal device, characterized in that it comprises:
    一个或多个处理器;One or more processors;
    一个或多个存储器;One or more memories;
    以及一个或多个计算机程序,其中所述一个或多个计算机程序被存储在所述一个或多个存储器中,所述一个或多个计算机程序包括指令,当所述指令被所述终端设备的一个或多个处理器执行时,使得所述终端设备执行如权利要求1~6中任一项所述的方法。And one or more computer programs, wherein the one or more computer programs are stored in the one or more memories, and the one or more computer programs include instructions. When executed by one or more processors, the terminal device is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
  24. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:A network device, characterized in that it comprises:
    一个或多个处理器;One or more processors;
    一个或多个存储器;One or more memories;
    以及一个或多个计算机程序,其中所述一个或多个计算机程序被存储在所述一个或多个存储器中,所述一个或多个计算机程序包括指令,当所述指令被所述网络设备的一个或多个处理器执行时,使得所述网络设备执行如权利要求7~15中任一所述的方法,或使得所述网络设备执行如权利要求16~22中任一所述的方法。And one or more computer programs, wherein the one or more computer programs are stored in the one or more memories, and the one or more computer programs include instructions, when the instructions are executed by the network device When executed by one or more processors, the network device is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 7-15, or the network device is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 16-22.
  25. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1~6中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求7~15中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求16~22中任意一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes any one of claims 1 to 6 The method described in item, or the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 7-15, or the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 16-22.
  26. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括一个或多个处理器和通信接口,所述一个或多个处理器用于读取指令,以执行权利要求1~6中任意一项所述的方法,或者执行权利要求7~15中任意一项所述的方法,或者执行权利要求16~22中任意一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized by comprising one or more processors and a communication interface, the one or more processors being used to read instructions to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, or to execute The method of any one of claims 7-15, or the method of any one of claims 16-22.
PCT/CN2021/078746 2020-06-22 2021-03-02 Method and device for configuring terminal device WO2021258766A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010570970.0 2020-06-22
CN202010570970 2020-06-22
CN202010740597.9 2020-07-28
CN202010740597.9A CN114095978B (en) 2020-06-22 2020-07-28 Method and device for configuring terminal device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021258766A1 true WO2021258766A1 (en) 2021-12-30

Family

ID=79282777

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/078746 WO2021258766A1 (en) 2020-06-22 2021-03-02 Method and device for configuring terminal device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2021258766A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4038937A4 (en) * 2019-12-12 2023-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Improvements in and relating to telecommunication systems
WO2023173981A1 (en) * 2022-03-15 2023-09-21 华为技术有限公司 Task configuration method and apparatus

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102056256A (en) * 2009-11-05 2011-05-11 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Switching capability processing method, device and system
CN102123517A (en) * 2010-01-11 2011-07-13 中国移动通信集团公司 Method and device for reestablishing radio resource control (RRC) connection
CN102685847A (en) * 2011-03-14 2012-09-19 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Inter-operation between base stations having different protocol revisions
CN105101312A (en) * 2014-05-15 2015-11-25 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for upward data processing

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102056256A (en) * 2009-11-05 2011-05-11 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Switching capability processing method, device and system
CN102123517A (en) * 2010-01-11 2011-07-13 中国移动通信集团公司 Method and device for reestablishing radio resource control (RRC) connection
CN102685847A (en) * 2011-03-14 2012-09-19 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Inter-operation between base stations having different protocol revisions
CN105101312A (en) * 2014-05-15 2015-11-25 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for upward data processing

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4038937A4 (en) * 2019-12-12 2023-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Improvements in and relating to telecommunication systems
WO2023173981A1 (en) * 2022-03-15 2023-09-21 华为技术有限公司 Task configuration method and apparatus

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11399361B2 (en) V2X sidelink communication
CN114900547B (en) Communication method and device
WO2020216133A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2019019224A1 (en) Command receiving method, device and communications system
CN113271178B (en) User equipment capacity transmission method, information transmission method and related products
EP3462780A1 (en) Frequency band processing method and device
WO2021000688A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving capability information
WO2021258766A1 (en) Method and device for configuring terminal device
CN113747516B (en) Method and device for realizing service continuity
US20230141231A1 (en) Mobile Edge Computing Processing Method and Related Device
WO2020211778A1 (en) Cell handover method and apparatus
US20220046754A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2021208888A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN116057998A (en) Communication method, device and apparatus
EP4044759A1 (en) Rrc connection recovery method and device
CN113747605A (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2020103106A1 (en) Inter-system handover method and apparatus
WO2021164287A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021027786A1 (en) Method and device for ue to report udc information
WO2021134763A1 (en) Method, apparatus and device for recovering transmission
WO2021097689A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and device
CN114095978B (en) Method and device for configuring terminal device
CN113727368A (en) Communication method and device
WO2020147040A1 (en) Data replication transmission configuration method, apparatus, chip, and computer program
WO2022188677A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21830024

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21830024

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1